Home

369-M__XT3 configuration manual

1. CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J6 J J6 J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 i J4 p J3 b J4 7 J3 i e The play channels OUT connectors are always assigned from the left to the right filmu aea CODEC 2 V aaaea CODEC SY aaiuan menus CODE Cid tiuana manne CODEC S aims OD OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN 4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 IN 2 OUT 5 IN1 OUT 6 IN 6B w IN 5B w IN 4B w IN 3B w IN 2B w IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J6 J J J J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SDHD J4 F J3 i J4 p J3 i J4 J J3 p J4 p J3 J4 p J3 J4 i J3 l 60 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si e The primary links of the V3X boards mentioned in the tables of this section correspond to the upper connectors of a codec module o J8 for IN connectors o J7 for OUT connectors J6 is also equivalent to J7 IN 6 OUT 1 J8 J7 8 J IN 6B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 J6 J CHAR OUT OUT 1B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SD HD CHAR SD J1 e The secondary links of the V3X boards correspond to the middle connectors of a codec module o J5 for IN connectors o J3for OUT connectors
2. us CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 IN 1B u CHAR our f our CHAR OUT our 6B SD HD 3 Multicam Configuration 61 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 62 Enhanced Playout Mode On EVS servers equipped with H3X and V3X boards and running a frame codec both decoders of a V3X codec module can be used in specific conditions to increase the decoding performances during a replay This enhanced playout mode is configurable per channel When the enhanced playout mode is enabled it is effectively used when the video is played out faster than the standard speed 100 with a standard recorder 50 in SLSM 2x 33 in SLSM 3x The enhanced playout mode is automatically enabled when all conditions below are fulfilled The EVS server is equipped with H3X and V3X boards e The EVS server is running a frame codec AVC Intra MPEG2 Intra or DVCPro in 1080i The Vertical Interpolation parameter is enabled in the Server tab Interpolation settings The Mix on One Channel parameter for the related play channel is disabled in the Channels tab Mix on One Channel settings e The 3D parameter is disabled in the Channels tab Base settings Channel Assignment in XREC Configurations With V3X boards the XREC configurations should be cabled in the following sequence 1 Cable the play channels from left to right 2 Cable the record channels from right to left starting with the primary links
3. Date and Time Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Description Number of clips out of the max clip numbers stored locally on the EVS server Number of clips out of the max clip numbers stored on the XNet network This section specifies the date and time of the EVS server Maintenance This section provides some commands to perform the following maintenance actions Command Reset archive status Resync to TC ref Delete keyword file Mm EW I Record train reset Description Resets the flag of all clips whose archive status has been enabled with the Archive fonction on the Remote panel Resynchronizes the server timecode to the timecode reference Deletes the selected keyword file Press SPACEBAR until you select the keyword file to remove and press ENTER Resets the record trains before their field counter overflows Users are requested to confirm the action before performing the reset See section Record Train Maintenance on page 43 4 Monitoring at V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sa 4 1 3 Raid and Disk Status Window Introduction The second page gives information on the disks or raids from internal and or external storage SERVER MONITORING PAGE 2 RAID type External Arrays Status 16 4 1 raids 04 spares 4 RAID status 01 02 03 04 05 07 08 09 10 13 14 15 16 01 0 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 0111213 14 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 Legend OK Raid Type The Raid type section di
4. EVS Remote for XSense Remote Panel code between 103 and 109 or code 96 EVS IPDP code 120 or 121 Sony BVW75 code 118 e XtenDD35 code 118 e Odetics and Odetics FK code 119 e VDCP and VDCP FK code 119 EVS AVSP code 120 or 121 Edit Rec code 122 LinX code 123 On port 1 only IPDP Channel and Control Settings PGM or REC Name Description Audio Settings Number of Tracks Description Values 6 Truck Manager Plugin User defined name for play or record channel This name will be used for the OSD and in the I PDirector application suite The name can contain maximum 24 characters Number of mono audio tracks associated to each video channel 4 Monos default 8 Monos or 16 Monos 317 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 6 7 Network Area Introduction This section describes the various settings available in the Network area Once you have specify the requested values for the various settings click the Apply button to apply the values remotely to Multicam SDTI Speed Description Enables the selection of the SDTI option and the bandwidth for the XNet network On the XT3 server there is one pair of SDTI connectors XNet2 Non Relay connectors are used at 1485 or 2970 Mbps The SDTI circuit is closed only when the Multicam software is started Values The following values are available e No Relay 1485 Mbps e No
5. Example 1xSLSM 6PH 1 PLAY MIX XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1XxSLSM 6PH 1 PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below CODEC CODEC E OUT 1 IN 3 IN 1 PLAY REC 1 1 3 J7 J8 IN 4B 35 IN 3B 35 IN 2B us IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC 1 6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR ouT our 3B CHAR out f our 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 p J4 J3 J6 76 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 MEF Available 3G SLSM 6 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 AU server A single 3G cable transports both phases and is connected to the primary connector of the codec module on the rear panel This accounts for two channels on the V3X board The table shows the channel assignment at the level of the V3X board IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec TS APRECIE Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch XREC configurations 0 1 Example 1x3G SLSM 6PH 1 PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM configuration with 1x3G SLSM 6PH 1 PLAY in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below On the codec module of the V3X board used both primary and secondary channels are used for each 3G SLSM REC CODEC 2
6. Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Setting Name All PC LAN settings only editable from the Multicam Setup window Some base settings e Inputs e Outputs e Base config One audio setting e Number of tracks One recorder setting e SD Autosense e REC capacity All SDTI settings e Speed e Netname e Net number e Type All Gigabit settings e Gigabit connection e Gigabit IP configuration 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 2 3 2 1 Supported Configurations General Information on Supported Configurations Overview on Supported Configuration Types The main supported configurations on the various EVS servers are presented ina graphical and user friendly way on the following webpage of the EVS website http www evs com backpanel index html An XT3 server equipped with V3X boards supports the following configurations types e standard SD HD configurations e standard SD HD XREC configurations using secondary links for independent recorders e SLSMSD HD configurations e SLSMSD HD XREC configurations e 3D 1080p configurations e SLSM 3D 1080p configurations e 4K configurations SLSM 4K configurations q Note q The feature Mix on one channel is available on all SD HD configurations Number of Record and Play Channels The number of record and play channels for a given configuration is defined in the Channels tab in the Base settings See section Base
7. Outputs Description Number of logical play channels in the given configuration Values e OnXT36U 0 6 Spotbox 1 5 LSM e On XT3 4U 0 4 Spotbox 1 3 LSM See section General Information on Supported Configurations on page 59 for more information on number of record channels and on supported configurations Base Config The default values are only applicable to the settings in the Multicam application not to the settings in the Truck Manager plugin Description Mode the EVS server is working in The base configurations available depend on the server type and on the valid license codes Values e Multicam LSM mode where the EVS server is controlled by the Remote Control Panel or from the Multicam production screens e Replay Only LSM restricted Multicam LSM mode without playlist management split audio nor support of hypermotion cameras e Video Delay mode where the server is used to play out the input with a video delay e Spotbox mode where the EVS server can be controlled by industry standard protocols Sony BVW75 VDCP Odetics DD35 EVS AVSP IPDP EditRec or LinX API or from the Multicam production screens e XSense mode where the EVS server can be controlled by the XSense Remote Panel or from the Multicam production screens e Server mode where the EVS server can only be controlled by the supported industry standard protocols but not from the Multicam production screens Default value Multicam
8. XREC configurations 1 1 4 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 AREG Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec TA HRES ELAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 2 2 2 3 0 Example 1xSLSM 3PH 2REC 1PLAY MIX The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1xSLSM 3PH 2REC 1PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below T pe a Se OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 IN2 OUT 5 IN 1 T X J T REC 1 1 J8 IN 6B 5 IN 5B w IN 4B u IN 3B u IN 2B u IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR ouT our 4B CHAR our our 5B CHAR our our 6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J3 J3 amp J3 J3 Example 1xSLSM 3PH 3 REC 2 PLAY MIX XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1xSLSM 3PH 3 REC 2 PLAY MIX in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below eee ODEC 2 amma a COREA a apr SPECS OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN 4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 PLAY PLAY REC REC os j 1 2 2 1 3 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 6B 5 IN 5B 5 IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B om IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J
9. Bitrate Default bitrate Recorded video lines 128 SD Mjpeg Standard SDan 20 100 Mbps 30 40 50 Mbps 30 Mbps 30 Mbps 576 lines 608 lines L23 310 L336 623 L7 310 L320 default 623 592 lines L15 310 L328 623 608 lines L7 310 L320 623 DVCPro 50 50 Mbps 50 Mbps 480 lines L23 262 L285 524 DVCPro 50 50 Mbps 50 Mbps 576 lines L23 310 L335 622 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 V5 Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 720p 50 Hz HD Codec Mjpeg EVS Bitrate 20 320 Mbps Default 100 bitrate Horizontal 640 Resolution 768 960 1024 1280 default AVID Codec DNxHD 115 Bitrate 1 115 Mbps Default 115 bitrate Horizontal 1280 Resolution 3 Multicam Configuration HD Mjpeg Standard 20 320 100 640 768 960 1024 1280 default AVID DNxHD 175 116 185 175 1280 HD Mpeg AVC DVCPro 2 Intra Intra 100 HD 20 260 111 100 100 111 100 640 1280 960 768 960 1024 1280 default AVID Apple Apple DNxHD ProRes ProRes 175x 10b 422 LT 422 SQ 116 185 85 120 175 85 120 1280 1280 1280 XDCAM HD 50 50 1280 Apple ProRes 422 HQ 185 185 1280 129 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 130 Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 720p 59 94 Hz A HD HD 3 7 HD Mpeg AVC DVCPro XDCAM Codec Mjpeg Mjpeg EVS SGEE 2 Intra Intra 100 HD HD Bitrate 2
10. January 2015 Audio locked to video Availability Description Values Default value This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid Specifies whether you will be able to define different durations for the audio and video transitions inside a playlist when the Advanced Audio Editing parameter is enabled This setting is irrelevant if the Advanced Audio Editing parameter is disabled The possible values are e Yes The duration of video and audio transitions in a playlist cannot be different No The duration of the video and audio transitions ina playlist can be different If the license code 112 for advanced audio editing is not valid the parameter value is forced to Yes Yes Audio effect duration Availability Description Values Default value Wipe type Description Values Default value 252 This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid This setting is only available when the Audio locked to video setting is set to No Sets the duration of the audio transition effect when e the Advanced Audio Editing setting is enabled e the Audio locked to video setting is set to No The specified value is used as default value in Playlist Edit mode If the Advanced Audio Editing is disabled this setting is not relevant since the video and audio transitions will always have the same duration based on the Video Effect Duration OsOOfr to 20s00fr OsOOfr
11. See section Base Settings on page 141 Limitations Codec Limitations e 4K can only be used with the DNxHD Intra codecs 4K cannot be used with LongGOP or Proxy codecs Configuration Limitations e 4K does not support 3D configurations e 4K supports the Mix on one channel feature with limitations Audio Limitations e 4K does not support 16 audio tracks Operational Limitations The following features are NOT available with 4K e EditRec e Offside Line internal or external e CAM Mapping e Internal Loop mode e Replace External Loop Split Screen feature e Paint Target feature 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 3 2 10 4K Configurations Assignment Principles A 4K image consists of four 1080p frames transported via four 3G SDI links Each 1080p frame of a 4K image is called an image quadrant Each image quadrant is assigned to its corresponding 3G SDI link in the following sequence 1 TL 2 TR Top Left Top Right 3 BL 4 BR Bottom Left Bottom Right XT3 4U Servers Available Configuration The tables below show the available 4K configurations on a XT3 4U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 2 2 2 BRR Example 4K 1REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder
12. The clips are sent from the Short IN to the Short OUT points to which the guardbands of the destination machine are added Long The clips are sent from the Protect IN to the Protect OUT Default Values Short 3 Multicam Configuration 263 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Push Receive Page Description Specifies the page of your machine where clips sent to you by other network operators using the PUSH function must be stored See section Navigating and Editing in the Multicam Configuration Window on page 53 for more information on how to enable pages Values Page 1 to 10 0 Several pages can be selected Default Values Page 5 3 9 10 Audio Settings 264 User Interface These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 3 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel 8 1 The following screenshot displays the Audio settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface Audio slow motion Description Allows users to play back or mute the audio track when the playing speed is different than 100 Values The following values are possible e Yes The audio track is not muted during the playback e No The audio track is muted during the playback Default value No 3 Multicam Configuration CO
13. a Network No relay 2 Server Network IP address 308 v Resolution 1080i Bitrate Mbps Jutputs Multicam LSM None No EVS Remote EVS Remote Main ctr EVS Remote EVS Remote EVS Remote EVS Remote EVS Remote EVS Remote EVS Remote EVS Remote Custom 172211103 6 Truck Manager Plugin CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Description V5 The table below describes the various elements of the Multicam plugin Part qli 6 Truck Manager Plugin Name Plugin name Apply button Menu icon Configuration Area Server Area Channels Area Network Area Description Field to expand or collapse the plugin area Button to apply the parameter values to Multicam Icon to open the contextual menu which provides general commands or commands specific to Multicam See section Contextual Menu on page 310 Area that allows users to select the configuration line and access the advanced Multitcam parameters See section Configuration Area on page 311 Area that allows users to set the main server parameters of Multicam See section Server Area on page 312 Area that allows users to set the main channels parameters of Multicam See section Channels Area on page 314 Area that allows users to set the main network parameters of Multicam See section Network Area on page 318 309 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 6 3 310 Contextual Menu I
14. e Monitoring output same behavior as J4 This is especially useful in XREC configurations Values The following values are available for the Char OUT setting e No J3is used with its initial behavior e Yes J3is used as a monitoring output same as J4 With V3X boards the value is forced if a single behavior is possible The values for the Format setting is read only and corresponds to the actual output format Default value No 3 Multicam Configuration 209 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Char OUT J4 Description Values Default value Char OUT J1 Description Value SD aspect ratio Availability Description Values Default value SD edge enhanc Description Values Default value 210 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Specifies the monitoring output format generated on the J4 connector e SD e HD not supported in 1080p 3G Level A e 3G System dependent Specifies the monitoring output type generated on the J1 connector e CVBS This parameter is available when the EVS server is configured in HD Specifies how the aspect ratio of HD video is converted in SD 4 3 Letterbox Black stripes are placed above and below the active video to compensate for the full width e 4 3 Crop Left and right ends of the active video are cropped to compensate for the full height e 16 9 Corresponds to the HD aspect ratio It is also called anamorphic 4 3 Letterbox Defines the edge enhancer str
15. 2 Click Select next to the top field and select the configuration file you want to import 3 Tick the configuration line to be replaced on the EVS server 4 Click Import The configuration line is imported with its original name onto the selected configuration line on the EVS server 20 2 Multicam Setup ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 2 6 2 2 7 2 Multicam Setup Changing the Position of Configuration Lines In the Server Based Application To move a configuration line up in the list in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted 2 Doone of the following Tomove the selected line up press CTRL UP ARROW Tomove the selected line down press CTRL DOWN ARROW In the Web Based Interface The feature to move configuration lines up and down in the list of configuration lines is not available as such in the web based interface You can however use the import and export feature to change the position of lines in the list of configuration lines Copying Pasting and Deleting Configuration Lines How to Copy Paste Configuration Lines In the Server Based Application Warning Note that copying a line onto another position will erase the configuration on the selected position To copy and paste a configuration line in the server based
16. E1 04 E1 05 E1 06 E1 07 E1 08 E1 09 E1 10 E1 11 E1 12 E1 13 E1 14 E1 15 E1 16 OUT 2 E2 01 E2 02 E2 03 E2 04 E2 05 E2 06 E2 07 E2 08 E2 09 E2 10 E2 11 E2 12 E2 13 E2 14 E2 15 E2 16 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT5 OUT6 E3 01 E3 02 E3 03 E3 04 E3 05 E3 06 E3 07 E3 08 E3 09 E3 10 E3 11 E3 12 E3 13 E3 14 E3 15 E3 16 E4 01 E4 02 E4 03 E4 04 E4 05 E4 06 E4 07 E4 08 E4 09 E4 10 E4 11 E4 12 E4 13 E4 14 E4 15 E4 16 E5 01 E5 02 E5 03 E5 04 E5 05 E5 06 E5 07 E5 08 E5 09 E5 10 E5 11 E5 12 E5 13 E5 14 E5 15 E5 16 E6 01 E6 02 E6 03 E6 04 E6 05 E6 06 E6 07 E6 08 E6 09 E6 10 E6 11 E6 12 E6 13 E6 14 E6 15 E6 16 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Audio Embedded Outputs V5 By default the audio mono channels from the A V material stored on the EVS server are mapped to the embedded mono channels on the play channels as presented in the table below The table shows the maximum number of players and an audio configuration with 16 tracks mono channels Mono1 Mono2 Mono3 Mono4 Mono5 Mono6 Mono7 Mono Mono9 Mono10 Mono11 Mono12 Mono13 Mono14 Mono15 Mono16 OUT 1 E1 01 E1 02 E1 03 E1 04 E1 05 E1 06 E1 07 E1 08 E1 09 E1 10 E1 11 E1 12 E1 13 E1 14 E1 15 E1 16 OUT 2 E2 01 E2 02 E2 03 E2 04 E2 05 E2 06 E2 07 E2 08 E2 09 E2 10 E2 11 E2 12 E2 13 E2 14 E2 15 E2 16 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUTS5 E3 01 E3 02 E3
17. EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 e Cam C and Cam D can be mapped to network cameras using respectively the Cam C and Cam D parameters Cam Mapping Description Enables or disables the cam mapping feature Values Yes No Default Values No Cam X Availability This setting is displayed for each available camera line that can be mapped to a network camera Description Specifies the network camera mapped to the corresponding local camera Values The available network camera that can be mapped Default Values none 3 9 13 Hypermotion Management Principles The hypermotion cameras can be controlled by the LSM Remote Panel The camera is linked via a RS422 or LAN PC connector to the same XT3 server as the controlling Remote Panel In setups including a hypermotion camera the following principles apply e e e 274 An XT3 server cannot control more than one hypermotion camera The hypermotion camera is used with the classical channel configurations Not all Multicam LSM configurations with several PGMs and several Remotes are supported within the current RS422 and channel configuration constraints If the Remote Mode setting in the Hypermotion Controller settings is set to Hypermotion only an additional menu is made available in the main menu of the LSM Remote Panel 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si of Remotes Hypermotion Mode
18. SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 p J4 J3 3 Multicam Configuration 73 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 74 Available SLSM 3 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 3 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 4U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 any PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec 3x REC Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan 1 0 0 co M er XREC configurations 1 3 1 2 0 1 Example 1xSLSM 3PH 3REC 1PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1XxSLSM 3PH 3REC 1PLAY in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 REC REC REC 1 3 1 2 1 1 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 amp REC4 REC3 REC2 J6 J J J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 p J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Available SLSM 4 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 4 Phase configurations in
19. our our 5B CHAR our our 6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 i J4 3 J3 F J4 i J3 i J4 J3 F J4 _ J3 F J4 3 J3 i 86 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Available SLSM 6 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 6U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 ae Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec on Lalas Lao Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch XREC configurations o E E BESES Example 1xSLSM 6PH 2 PLAY MIX The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1xSLSM 6PH 2 PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below IN6 OUT 1 IN 5 OUT 2 IN 4 IN3 OUT 4 IN2 OUTS5 IN 1 OUT 6 E PLAY E Ee REC amp 1 1 J8 J8 J7 IN 6B u IN 5B w IN 4B u IN 3B w IN 2B u IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 Ae REC 1 5 J CHAR our our 1B CHAR ouT our 2B CHAR ouT our 3B CHAR ouT our 4B CHAR our our 5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 F J3 i J4 f J3 i J4 p J3 i J4 J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 J3
20. without using the left codec modules already cabled as play channels 3 Cable the remaining record channels to assign starting from right to left and using the secondary link for the remaining codec modules Clip and Record Train Compatibility e Clips are compatible across all Multicam configurations including SLSM clips e Record trains are also compatible as long as the number of record channels cameras is not increased in LSM mode Example o 1REC gt 2 REC Record trains are lost o 4REC gt 3 REC Record trains are kept e Record trains are always kept in Spotbox mode even when the number of record trains is increased 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 2 2 SD HD Base Configurations Introduction The tables below show the available SD HD configurations with an XT3 4U server and XT3 6U server as well as how the BNC connectors should be cabled The XREC configurations presented after the standard ones make use of the secondary channel of the codec module as an independent record channel See section Channel Assignment in XREC Configurations on page 62 Q Note q When the option mix on one channel is activated on a play channel Channels tab page 7 the secondary link of the codec module J3 on V3X board of the play channel is used to play transition effects XT3 4U Servers Available Standard Configurations IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 Pri
21. 00 00 00 e TCO No Enables disables the insertion of the user bits in the HD output The values specified for the HAnc LTC and HAnc VITC fields have to be the same When TCO is selected in the HAnc LTC and HAnc VITC field the user bits values will also remain static and fixed to 00 00 00 00 whatever the selected value Yes default No 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si SD OUT in HD and SD D VITC Description Enables disables the insertion of the embedded timecode D VITC in the SD output Values The values specified for the D VITC field can be as follows No No new timecode inserted in the output Senin Same timecode as in the input inserted in the output Timecode from the LTC table inserted in the e LTC output USER User defined timecode inserted in the output All D VITC timecodes generated in the video e TCO signal coming out of the given PGM will remain static and fixed to 00 00 00 00 Default value No Lines Description Lines on which the specified timecode must be written on the loop of the input Values From 06 08 to 20 22 Default values e 14 16 in NTSC e 19 21 in PAL UserBits Description Enables disables the insertion of the user bits in the SD output When TCO is selected for the D VITC field the user bits values will also remain static and fixed to 00 00 00 00 whatever the selected value Values Yes default No 3 Multicam Configuration 187 EVS B
22. 00 0c e eee ee 21 2 2 7 Copying Pasting and Deleting Configuration Lines 222 21 2 3 Server Parameters 2 2 22 cece cece c cece cece cece ccc ce cece cece cece ce eeeeeeeeenees 23 2 3 1 Chapter Contents _ 2 2 2 0 0 2 222 c cence cence cece cece ceceeeecceeees 23 2 3 2 Assigning a Server Facility Name 02 0 00 0 e cece eee eee cece cece 23 2 3 3 Activating and Deactivating the Password Protection 2 24 2 3 4 Setting the Server LAN PC Address 00 000 00 ccc ceeee cece eeeeeeeee 26 2 3 5 Setting the Server Date and Time 2 000 c cece e cece ee eee 27 2 3 6 Setting the Default Output To VGA Video 22 202022 e eee eee 29 2 3 7 Configuring Server Raids 000 00000 e cece eee 29 2 4 Licenses and Maintenance 2 0 222 e eee eee eee eee ee eee 32 2 4 1 Overview on Options Codes Management 222200000 e ee eee ee 32 2 4 2 Options Codes Management Window 20 2 eee eeeee cece eeeee 33 2 4 3 Entering and Removing License Codes 0 00000002222000 35 2 5 Server Maintenance 0 00 000 c ccc 00000000 0a aaora aa eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 2 5 1 Chapter Contents 02 2 000002 cece eee ccc eee e cece cc cccceeeeceeeees 37 2 5 2 Rebooting the EVS Server 2 0 2 eee eee cece cece ee eeeeeeee 37 2 5 3 Hardware Check 000 2 2 22 e ccc e eee e c
23. 03 E3 04 E3 05 E3 06 E3 07 E3 08 E3 09 E3 10 E3 11 E3 12 E3 13 E3 14 E3 15 E3 16 Audio Digital Outputs E4 01 E4 02 E4 03 E4 04 E4 05 E4 06 E4 07 E4 08 E4 09 E4 10 E4 11 E4 12 E4 13 E4 14 E4 15 E4 16 E5 01 E5 02 E5 03 E5 04 E5 05 E5 06 E5 07 E5 08 E5 09 E5 10 E5 11 E5 12 E5 13 E5 14 E5 15 E5 16 OUT 6 E6 01 E6 02 E6 03 E6 04 E6 05 E6 06 E6 07 E6 08 E6 09 E6 10 E6 11 E6 12 E6 13 E6 14 E6 15 E6 16 The default mapping to audio digital output connectors differ depending on the number of tracks mono channels defined 8 Audio Tracks With audio configurations with 8 tracks mono channels the audio mono channels of the A V material stored on the EVS server are sent to the digital audio output connectors of the play channels as presented in the table below 3 Multicam Configuration 175 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 176 The table shows the maximum number of players and the audio configuration with 8 tracks mono channels Mono1 Mono2 Mono3 Mono4 Mono5 Mono6 Mono7 Mono8s 4 or 16 Audio Tracks OUT 1 D 01 D 02 D 03 D 04 D 05 D 06 D 07 D 08 OUT 2 D 09 D 10 D11 D 12 D 13 D 14 D15 D 16 OUT 3 OUT 4 None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None OUT 5 None None None None None None None None OUT 6 None None None None None None None None With audio configu
24. 10 sec which a break in timecodes in the recorded material will generate a peak alert When a peak alert is generated the value in Peak Alerts field is incremented by one Frequency Number of frequency alerts generated for the recorder since O alert the last start of the server A frequency alert is generated when X timecode jumps have been detected in Y seconds The X value is defined in the Frequency Number field The Y value is defined in the Frequency Time field In this case this field is automatically incremented by one Frequency Number of timecode jumps detected for the recorder after 10 number which a frequency alert can be generated Frequency Period of time in seconds after which a frequency alert can 50 time be generated 291 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 User Timecode Default VITC Description Valles VITC jumps Number of timecode jumps calculated in the VITC timecode 1 jump table for the given recorder since the last start of the server VITC Number of continuous timecodes to be received after a 50 threshold break in VITC timecodes in the recorded material in order to create a new record in the VITC timecode jump table 4 1 5 Timecode Monitoring Window Introduction The Timecode Monitoring Window displays the various timecodes used in the running configuration It varies somewhat depending on whether you work in SD or HD Timecodes on SD Recorders When the server
25. 11 for more information This area provides the main commands for server administration and maintenance For more information click the Tools command below to go to the dedicated sections in the Multicam Setup chapter e import export configuration lines e Assign server facility name e import export keyword files e Export log files e Options code management e Hardware check e Raid Configuration e Set LAN PC address Set date and time Default to VGA e Reboot e Enable password for technical settings This area shows a Summary of the server parameters for the configuration line selected in the Configuration Lines area The summary displays the following information 1 codec type bitrate video standard for each active codec 2 based config INs OUTs No audios 3 SDTI No server name server type 2 Multicam Setup CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 2 1 2 2 Multicam Setup Name of area 5 Task bar 5 Status bar 6 Server Information V5 Description The Task bar Server based application displays commands for the main actions in the window See section Navigability and Commands on page 9 for more information The Status bar web based interface displays e the Multicam Setup application status e the date and time of the last refresh e the Refresh button This area displays the following information on the EVS server e genlock status OK or bad e timecode a
26. 12 05 D January 2015 VGA amp Remote sync Description Values Default value Specifies whether and how the current clips machine page and bank of VGA screens and Remote Panel must be synchronized The following values are possible No Call channel VGA Description Values Default value No Clip machine page and bank can be selected independently on the VGA screen and on the Remote Panel Yes Clip machine page and bank are synchronized between VGA screen and Remote Panel Connecting to the clips of a network machine or coming back to the clips of the local machine or selecting a new page or bank on one side will be automatically reflected on the other Server Clip pages and banks can be selected independently on VGA and Remote Panel but connecting to the clips of a network machine or coming back to the clips of the local machine on the VGA or Remote Panel will be automatically reflected on the other Enables or disables the Call Channel function on the VGA Clip screen This function allows the operator to select on which PGM channel the clips called from the keyboard tablet and VGA should be loaded Yes No Yes 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si PGM PRV mode Description Allows the user to select the PGM PRV mode on the LCD display as a function accessible from the A button on the Remote Panel s main menu Otherwise the PGM PRV mode selection
27. 12 05 Si Example 1xSLSM 2PH 2PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1XxSLSM 2PH 2 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below orr ES er ODEC 4 OUT 3 IN 1 OUT 4 REC o REC J7 J8 J7 IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 4 ua IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J J6 J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 Example 3xSLSM 2PH 1PLAY XREC CHAR SD J1 The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 3xSLSM 2PH 1PLAY in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below i ae CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 ma j le J7 IN 4B 35 4 IN 3B us 4 u 4 IN 1B u F EJ JEJ J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR ouT our 28 CHAR ouT our 3B CHAR out our 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 3 Multicam Configuration 71 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 72 Available 3G SLSM 2 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 AU server A single 3G cable transports both phases and is connected to the primary connector of the codec module on the rear panel This accounts for two channels on the V3X board The table shows the channel assignment at the level of the V3X boar
28. 2 and or XStoreSE to be visible across the network and easily transferable Warning Changes to the SDTI parameters require an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows to be applied User Interface The SDTI setting are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Network tab in the basic and advanced display mode on page 1 in the server and web based interfaces e partly in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T3 1 The SDTI Priorities setting will also be dealt with in this section and is available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Network tab in the basic and advanced display mode on page 1 in the server and web based interfaces e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T3 2 q Note q The SDTI settings will only be displayed if the SDTI board is present on the EVS server and if the SDTI license code 117 is valid The following screenshots display the SDTI and SDTI Priorities settings on the Network tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si SDTI priorities PGM1 PGM2 High Priority Speed Description Enables the selection of the SDTI option and the bandwidth for the XNet network On the XT3 server there is one pair of SDTI connectors XNet2 Non Relay connectors are used at 1485 or 2970 Mbps The SDTI circuit is closed only when the Multicam soft
29. A05 None None None None Mono2 A02 A06 None None None None Mono3 A03 A07 None None None None Mono4 A04 A08 None None None None Mono5 None None None None None None Mono6 None None None None None None Mono7 None None None None None None Mono8 None None None None None None Modifying the Audio Routing or Type Introduction Audio routing settings can be modified in the Channels tab in the Advanced Audio Settings It is possible to change e the audio type of all displayed audio channels at the same time by means of the shortcut keys described below in the server based application the buttons at the bottom of the table in the web based interface e the audio type of individual channels by manually editing the audio type value e the routing of an individual audio channel by editing the cell value in the advanced audio settings tables 3 Multicam Configuration 177 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Collective Editing Actions in Server and Web Based Interfaces You can apply the following editing actions to all audio channels of a page using the following shortcuts when available on the current page een alc omni andibatan Command description Server based Web based interface app Set all audio channels to Embedded CTRL E all E Set all audio channels to Digital CTRL D all D Set all audio channels to Analog CTRL A all A Set all audio channels to Embedded CTRL Y all EY DY Dolby E or Digital Dol
30. Both Intra and LongGOP essences of the clip are pushed When the Proxy essence is active it will always be pushed This value is therefore not selectable Intra LongGOP 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Push Target 1 2 Availability These parameters are only available in the server based application not in the web based interface Description Specifies to which machine s on the network the clips must automatically be sent when the operator uses the PUSH function on the Remote Panel The machines defined in this setting are also used as default target for clip copies The users can define two default targets Target 1 Target 2 The clips will be pushed in sequential order Values A list of values will be displayed depending on the value assigned to the Target setting When no target is defined in these parameters the user will be able to define the requested target when s he calls the PUSH function e lt network system name and number gt are listed and can be assigned for targets belonging to the SDTI network e lt GbE server name and IP Address gt are listed and can be assigned for targets belonging on the GbE network Default Values No target machine specified Push Mode Description Specifies how the clips should be sent using the PUSH function that is to say with or without the original guardbands Values The following values are possible Short
31. Channel Video connection interface on the V3X codec module It can be used and assigned as a player or record channel in a given configuration They are named with J8 for the primary channel when the codec module is used as a recorder J5 for the secondary channel when the codec module is used as a recorder J7 for the primary channel when the codec module is used as a player J3 for the secondary channel when the codec module is used as aplayer One channel 3G SDI can handle a bandwidth equivalent to 2 x HD SDI Codec module On the rear panel it refers to a set of 6 BNC connectors labelled as Codec 1 to Codec 6 On the V3X board it refers to the corresponding module board COD A or COD B fitted on one of the codec base board There are two codec modules per codec board Connector Video connection interface BNC on the rear panel The primary connector is named with from 1 to 6 the secondary connector is named from 1B to 6B D Decoder Processing unit that actually decodes the video signal Dual Link SDI interface in which the digital video stream is transferred as 2 HD SDI streams via two physical links 321 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 E Encoder Processing unit that actually encodes the video signal G GPI Abbreviation for General Purpose Interface This refers to a device used as an communication interface with the EVS server It has digital lines which may be used for input o
32. Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 3 53 Network Tab 3 5 1 Overview Network Tab V5 The Network tab consists of two pages in the basic and or advanced mode in the server based application The Network tab includes the settings on the SDTI network and Gigabit Ethernet network both networks used for the backup and transfer of video and audio data Setting List The table below presents the settings of the Network tab It specifies whether the setting is available e inthe basic or advanced display mode in the server based and web based interfaces e inthe Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Setting Name Basic SDTI settings P1 Speed Net name Net number x KX Kx Type SDTI Priorities settings High priority Gigabit Connection settings P1 MEW Physical interface MEI Link aggregation Gigabit IP Configuration settings P1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway MEI Gigabit Prioritization settings P2 3 Multicam Configuration Advanced Technical Setup P1 T3 X x P1 T3 X x x P1 T3 X P1 T3 X P2 T3 X 191 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 5 2 192 Setting Name Basic Advanced Technical Setup Configuration mode xX x x Connections xX x x Lo Res Hi Res Unreserved SDTI Settings Introduction The SDTI settings allow specifying the settings related to the SDTI network This network allows the content between EVS servers XF
33. DATA 1 Kanpe CHECKSUM K 1 BYTE 1 BYTE 1 BYTE 1 BYTE 1 BYTE where e CMD 1 Command category e DataCount number of byte in the command e CMD 2 number of the command Data x Command parameters e CheckSum validity check 5 Protocols 299 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Replies Ack command received and executed Name CMD 1 Data Count CMD 2 CheckSum Command 1 1 01 XX Nack Error Name CMD 1 Data Count CMD 2 Data 1 CheckSum Command 1 1 12 ZZ XX Supported Commands This table summarizes the supported commands 300 Command 00 0C Local Disable 00 11 Device Type Request 00 0D Local Enable 20 00 Stop 20 01 Play 20 02 Record 20 04 StandByOff 20 05 StandByOn 20 0F Eject 20 10 Forward 2X 11 Jog Fwd 2X 12 Var Fwd 2X 13 Shuttle Fwd 20 20 Rewind 2X 21 Jog Rew 2X 22 Var Rew 2X 23 Shuttle Rew 20 30 Preroll 24 31 CueUp With Data 20 54 Anti Clog Timer Disable Return 10 01 Ack 12 11 20 25 for PAL 12 11 21 25 for NTSC 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack customized 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack customized 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack No action 5 Protocols CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Command 20 55 Anti Clog Timer Enable 20 60 Full EE OFF 20 61 Full EE ON 20 64 Edit OFF 20 65 Edit ON 40 00 Timer 1 Preset 40 08 Timer 1 Reset 40 10 S
34. For instance if a user has code 22 1080p 3G and 23 3D Dual Link he cannot start the server in 3D 3G although he can select 3G and 3D Dual Link in the Multicam Configuration window To enable 3D 3G configurations to be started code 24 must be active Note O Clips recorded with the 3G Dual parameter in one mode Level A Level B or Dual are playable in another mode Level A Level B or Dual 146 3 Multicam Configuration ss V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si TwinRec Feature NEW Introduction The TwinRec feature allows the use of both record channels of each codec module Therefore you can ingest two record channels per codec module which means 12 record channels on a 6U EVS server fitted with 3 codec boards This feature is mainly applicable to entertainment shows When you use the TwinRec feature you will wire all main J8 and secondary J5 record channels but set the number of inputs to 6 not to 12 as only the main channels are displayed in the Multicam Configuration window Consequently the configuration of the main channels are automatically applied to the corresponding secondary channels The 12 recorded channels could then be streamed through a 10 GbE connection directly to an external storage or nearline using Xsquare The TwinRec feature can be activated via the TwinRec parameter available in the Channels tab Base Settings section See section Base Settings on page 141 Availa
35. J3 E J4 J3 E J4 E J3 J4 E J3 R 64 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sa XT3 6U Servers Available Standard Configurations IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 jo J J JT J J xx a Ba En E secs eoz meot oo secs eoz meot m secs eoz oH is fa a Ea Oo 86 1 mi ect Mi sec mI secs eoz oH mI secs eoz oH mI seco eo oY 0 2 mE ect a meo peor m secs eoz meot mI secs eoe oH 0 3 E ect ME meo peor M secs eoe meot oi Pas E paa ect m wo Pa we N oO oa oa 3 Multicam Configuration 65 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 4REC 2PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a standard 4REC 2PLAY configuration need to be cabled as shown below IN6 OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 IN3 OUT 4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT 6 oa fee ve i REC REC 2 1 J8 J8 J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 6B w IN 5B w IN 4B u IN 3B w IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J6 J6 J6 CHA our f our 1B CHAR our f our 28 CHAR ouT f our 3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUTS5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD Available XREC Configurations IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Se
36. J7 IN 6B u IN 5B w IN 4B u IN 3B u IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 ee REC REC 2B 1B J6 J6 CHAR out our 1B CHAR our our 2B CHAR our our 3B CHAR our our 4B CHAR OUT OUTSB CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 q Note q In an equivalent configuration with a single link 3G interface only the J8 connectors are cabled However the primary and secondary channels on the codec module of the V3X board are both used Available 1080p Configurations The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with standard cameras on a XT3 6U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 1 98 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si IN6 OUT1 INS5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch o o o s Pavi co D o a 2 o D aa s e ll o O gt a e ce gt o D e wa a C7 E o o Zz aa 3 Multic
37. Multicam version 12 65 26 Chassis type XT3 6U Serial number 24940 Facility Name XTNewADL Net name XTNewADL Net Number 16 SDTI Type Server Local clips 575466 Network clips 5732000 Date and Time Date lt dd mm yy gt time 22 04 2014 23 58 42 Maintenance Reset archive status Resync to TC ref lt ENTER gt Delete keyword file SAMPLE lt ENTER gt Record train reset lt ENTER gt System Information Field Name Description Multicam version Version of Multicam running on the EVS server Chassis type Type of server chassis with server height when relevant Serial number Serial number of the EVS server Facility name Name assigned to the EVS server for internal maintenance via the Tools menu Assign server facility name option in the Multicam setup window Net name Machine name on the SDTI network It is not mandatory It can however be useful to easily identify the servers running a given configuration as it is tied to the running configuration The Net Name will be displayed even if the SDTI code is not valid It is defined in the Multicam Configuration window Network tab SDTI section Net name parameter Net number Machine number from 1 to 29 on the network This number is user defined and must be unique for each system on the network SDTI type Role and privileges of the EVS server on the SDTI network 4 Monitoring 285 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 286 Field Name Local clips Network clips
38. OUT 1 IN 3 OUT 2 IN 2 OUT 3 IN 1 OUT 4 irq REC1 REC1 REC1 5 6 3G 3 4 3G 1 2 3G J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 4B 5 IN 3B a IN 2B 5 IN 1B 95 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J6 J6 J6 CHAR ouT our 1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD i amp XT3 6U Servers Available SLSM 2 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 6U server server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board 3 Multicam Configuration 77 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 RS Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec 2g REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 mi il e taf mi iit mi eS bi bf Eb mii D E e E BESES SS Sa M E E E S E o o e _ Ee il SM iti gt fH o MEB S nam ESE S E Sa EYE EERE E o fe i eee ifs aa o u E E E a a u e E Eo hes BB 78 3 Multicam Configuration a V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC i 5 F f 7 SLSM Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec 2x REC PLAY Ch C
39. PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP TAB SHIFT TAB F3 The following table presents the commands to edit the configuration settings in the Multicam Configuration window when the field has been selected using the TAB key In text fields you can directly type the requested value for a selected field Command description Increasing the value or displaying the next value in the list Decreasing the value or displaying the previous value in the list Moving the cursor position within a text field Resetting the value of the selected setting Resetting all values of all settings in the current tab for the selected configuration Resetting all values of all settings in all tabs for the selected configuration Applying changes Leaving without applying changes 3 Multicam Configuration Command key SPACEBAR SHIFT SPACEBAR SHIFT RIGHT ARROW LEFT ARROW F5 CTRL F5 CTRL SHIFT F5 ALT A ESC ENTER 53 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 54 Enabling Values in a List For some settings you need to enable values in a list of displayed values This is for example the case with the selection of pages receive pages protect pages in the Operation tab The enabled pages are highlighted in blue and the disabled pages are not highlighted To enable a list of values for a given setting proceed as follows 1 Select the list of values with the TAB key Once the list of values is selected the enabl
40. SD SLSM 3x Ident Parity In HD e None Single HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 3x Alt Parity e Double HD SLSM 3x Alt Parity e Double HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity e Triple HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 6x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 10x Alt Parity Single 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity e Double 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity e Triple 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity e Triple HD SLSM 3x Alt Parity e Quad HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity e Quad 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 4x Alt Parity e Double HD SLSM 4x Alt Parity Single 3G HD SLSM 6x Alt Parity In 4K Single HD SLSM 2x Note The fault tolerance on the different phases of the super motion camera is 90 of one field So there should be no delay between the different phases when all equipments are genlocked O 144 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si CEMI TwinRec Note q See section TwinRec Feature on page 147 for full information on this feature and the availability of the associated parameter Availability The parameter is only available in specific conditions and with the license code 33 TwinRec option Description Activates the TwinRec feature This feature makes it possible to ingest two record channels per codec module and therefore allows 12 record channels on a 6U EVS server Values Yes No default 3D Availability The parameter is only available and with the license code 23 for 3D Dual Li
41. Specifies how the cue point timecode will be memorized Values Two values are possible for this parameter e Live Memorizes cue points based on the timecode of the LIVE input e Playback Memorizes cue points based on the timecode of the field loaded on the main play channel Default value Live Preroll Description Preroll duration used when recalling a cue point Values From Os01fr to 5s00fr Default value OsO5fr 3 Multicam Configuration 247 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Record trains OUTs Description Values Default value Specifies whether Multicam will freeze or play through when it reaches an OUT point marked on the record train that is being played back Two values are possible for this parameter e Play through Multicam will still countdown to the OUT point but will keep playing through this point e Freeze Multicam will countdown to the OUT point and will automatically freeze on that picture if the post roll mode is disabled o onthat picture the post roll duration if the post roll mode is enabled When playing a clip Multicam always freezes on the OUT point or OUT point post roll duration when post roll mode is enabled Play through Default copy move Description Values Default value 248 Specifies whether the copy operations should be executed preferably using the SDTI or the Gigabit network Two values are possible for this parameter e SDTI
42. Specifies the vertical wipe effects from Left to Right or from Right to Left Vert L gt R Vert R gt L Vert L gt R 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Default playlist speed Description Defines the default speed used to play clips in a playlist Values The following values are possible Unknown and from 0 to 100 e Unknown means that the speed of the previous clip in the playlist will be used as a reference for the current clip e 0 will force the playlist to pause at the end of each clip e 1 to 100 will apply the specified speed as default speed for playlist elements Default value Unknown Insert in playlist Description Specifies if the clips add to a playlist are insert before or after the active clip in the playlist Values After Before Default value Before Confirm Ins Del clips Description Specifies whether a confirmation will be required each time the operator wants to add a clip to the playlist or remove a clip from the playlist Values Yes No Default value No Advanced audio editing Availability This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid Description Activates deactivates the desynchrone audio video editing in a playlist edit mode Changing this parameter modifies the display on the output monitors and adds special function keys on the LCD screen to define different transition points and durations on the video and audio t
43. T MNS tld Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch XREC configurations 1 0 1 3 Multicam Configuration 89 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 1xSLSM 10PH 1 PLAY MIX XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1xSLSM 10PH 1 PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below mmr OPEC Be ap a E RODEE A vp SODEC S 6 OUT 1 IN 5 IN2 OUT6 PLAY REC P 1 1 5 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J8 IN 6B 5 IN 5B 5 IN 4B u IN 3B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 REC he is REC 5 1 10 1 7 J J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR ouT f our 3B CHAR ouT f our 4B CHAR OUT OUTS5B CHAR ouT f our es SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 j J3 p J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 5 J4 J3 i CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC eo 1 2 J8 J7 J8 IN 2B 5 IN 1B u s 90 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 2 5 General Information on 3D Configurations Requirements The 3D is available when the following software requirements are met e The license code 23 or 24 is activated on the EVS server e The 3D parameter is set to Yes The 3G Dual parameter is set to a proper value See section Base Settings on page 141 Connections on EVS Servers with V3X Boards On the rear panel a 3D feed is cabled with one of the following interfaces e Dual Link interf
44. The copy operations are first executed through the SDT network If the SDTI network is temporarily unavailable the transfer is then tried through the Gigabit interface Transfers to GbE targets will always be performed via the GbE interface e Gigabit The copy operations are first executed via the GbE interface If the transfer is not possible ports not connected IP address unknown no more connection ports are available the transfer is then tried through SDTI The value is forced to Gigabit if the code 117 SDTI is not valid on the EVS server or if the SDTI network is not active SDTI 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Freeze on cue points Description Specifies whether Multicam will freeze or not when it reaches a cue point marked on the clip or the record train that is being played back The post roll parameter is not taken into account for this functionality Values e Yes The playout freezes on the cue points when playing clips or record trains where cue points have been defined No The playout plays through the cue points when playing clips or record trains Default value No Codec target Description Specifies which essence s of the clip will be used in case of clip copies to a distant server Values Two values are possible for this parameter e Intra Only the Intra essence of the clip is copied Intra LongGOP Both Intra and LongGOP essences of the clip
45. Timecode and Data Insertion 2 2 00 22 cece eee c cece cece cece 183 3 5 Network Tab noorie acl eh ie ok ov aus io ce bite ly 191 SB DRTE gt SOVEN EW arsi snc ulee e ha er a tid adits ce ne aa e is Sched lelaiscein age 191 3 5 2 SDTI Settings sorsra a c eee ce cece ceeeceeeeeeeees 192 3 5 3 Gigabit Connection 200 00 c cece cece ee ccececceeeeees 194 3 5 4 Gigabit IP Configuration 2 0 0 0 002222 c cece cece ee eeees 197 3 5 5 Gigabit Prioritization Settings 000 00002222 e cece e ees 199 3 6 Monitonng Tabi s 0 5 x tsetse ds ee odd tga aa odes Moke AO RE 202 3 01 SOVENIEW assag Piel Jit ie dM ieee ates Joh ons ee ee ile ath Le 202 3 6 2 Multiviewer Settings 0 0 0 0 0000022 c cece c cece cece cece eee eeees 203 3 6 3 OSD Settings 2 20 00 c cece cc cccceccecececeeeeeees 207 Table of Contents ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Table of Contents 3 6 4 Monitoring Settings 200 2222 e cece cece cece e cece 208 3 7 Protocol Tab 2 2 222 2 iaaa c cence cece ccc ccc cece andaa ana 211 3 7 1 Overview _ 22 222 e cece c cence ccc cece ccceeeceececeececeeeeececeeceeeceeseerees 211 3 7 2 RS422 Protocols Settings 0000 000 eee cece eee eee ee 213 3 7 3 Clip Identifiers 2 22 0 2 c cece eee ccc cee ce cece ccccccceecceceececeeeees 214 3 7 4 Sony BVW Settings 0020 22 cee cece cece cece eens 215 3 7 5 EditReC 2 0 0 2 occ cece cece ccc c enc cccccccccceeceeceecee
46. Types and Functions There are 3 types of GPIs available to be used on the servers The input lines 1 to 4 are opto isolated inputs The output lines 1 to 4 are relay outputs The GPls TTL lines can be configured as 4 TTL inputs or 4 TTL outputs in both cases numbered from 5 to 8 According to the protocol you are using the following functions are available and can be assigned to the GPls lines as described hereunder in the Function parameter AVSP Play Stop Still Recue GotoClipIN GotoClipOUT Next Skip e Sony Play Pause Recue Previous Next Skip DD35 Play Pause Recue Previous Next Skip e Odetics Play Pause Recue Next e VDCP Play Pause Recue Previous Next Skip Q Note q For all protocols except AVSP use the channel assignment PGM1 to PGM6 instead of the device protocol type Sony BVW75 Odetics The AVSP protocol does not require any GPI IN setting in this page as they are defined through specific serial AVSP commands For this reason specific AVSP commands will not be available via the Function parameter for the GPls IN TTL GPls set as GPls Description Defines the 4 configurable GPIs as inputs or outputs Values In Out Default value In GPls IN Channel Device Description Specifies the server channel or the external device connected to the corresponding GPI input line and therefore to which channel or device the GPI will be sent to Values The following values are po
47. X X Internal loop mode X X Grab image X X Browse button X X Default XFile X X Hypermotion and Cam Mapping Settings Setting Name Basic o ei cannar N 10x Authorize cam mapping X X Hypermotion settings P5 11 X Hypermotion X X Recorder X X Remote mode X X Port X X Protocol X X Dial Speed X X 3 Multicam Configuration 239 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Special Effects Settings Operational Setting Name Basic Setup U e gt Special Effects settings 12 X Pain target transition x lt Set colour for Colour Custom Y Custom U Custom V Split screen tracking Paint target OSD mon Internal offside line Take Epsio IP address Default tool X K KL X X X X X X X X X X X XKX KK X X X X X X X Xx Auto mark 3 9 2 OSD Settings User Interface The OSD settings allow users to specify which and how the information will be displayed onthe OSD These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 1 on the server and web based interfaces e inthe Operational menu of the Remote Control Panel 1 1 240 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si The following screenshot displays the OSD settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface E Cue number on OSD Description Enables disables the display of the cue point n
48. Yes EditRec Introduction to Edit Rec Edit Rec Protocol The Edit Rec is a linear editing engine associated to a play channel and a record channel ona server Its role is to emulate a VTR The Edit Rec engine relies on the Edit Rec protocol In addition both the play and the record channels of the Edit Rec engine are associated to the same RS422 port For more information on the Edit Rec feature refer to the Edit Rec manual Overview on Edit Rec Settings The Edit Rec settings allow specifying the settings that will be used by the Edit Rec feature The Edit Rec settings are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Protocol tab on page 2 for Edit Rec 1 and on page 3 for Edit Rec 2 in the basic and advanced display mode in the server and web based interfaces e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel pages T5 X for Edit Rec 1 and Edit Rec 2 3 Multicam Configuration V CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si oll The following screenshot displays the Edit Rec 1 settings on the Protocols tab in the web based interface Edit Rec 1 2 Setting As two Edit Rec engines can be defined on a server two pairs of play and record channels can be assigned to this Edit Rec When an Edit Rec engine is set up on a server the Port parameter on the corresponding Edit Rec settings page specifies the port number of the associated play and record channels If no Edit Rec engine has be
49. and play channels in a 4K configuration 1REC 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below OD OUT 1 IN3 10 5 i PLAY PLAY REC 1TL 1TR 1TR J8 J7 J8 J7 4 REC 1TL IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC 1BL IN 1B ua PLAY PLAY REC 1BL 1BR 1BR J6 J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR ouT f OUT 3B CHAR out OUT 4B SD HD SDIHD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 i J3 3 Multicam Configuration 113 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 XT3 6U Servers Available Configurations The tables below show the available 4K configurations on a XT3 6U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board IN6 OUT1 INS OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch ee ee Warning Mix on one channel is only supported in the 1REC 1PLAY configuration since the secondary link of the PGM is only available in this configuration The standard mix feature in PGM PRV mode is supported in the 1REC 2PLAY configuration Example 4K 1REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 4K configuration 1REC 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below OD OD ee CODE C3 enn e ODE C4 an CODECS mal IN 6 OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN 4 OUT 3 IN 3 OUT 4 IN2 OUT 5 IN 1
50. application proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted Press CTRL C to copy the line to the clipboard With the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys move to the position where you want to copy the line 4 Press CTRL V to paste the line to the selected position Press ENTER to confirm that you agree to replace the former configuration line by the one copied on the selected position 21 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 22 In the Web Based Interface The feature to copy and paste configuration lines is not available as such in the web based interface You can however use the import and export feature to change the position of lines in the list of configuration lines How to Delete Configuration Lines Warning When you delete a configuration line the line will automatically be deleted without prior warning message In the Server Based Application To delete a configuration line in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted 2 Press CTRL DEL to delete the line The line is directly deleted In the Web Based Interface To delete a configuration line in the web based interface click the Delete icon x next to the configu
51. are copied When the Proxy essence is active it will always be copied This value is therefore not selectable Default value Intra LongGOP Protocol Receive page Description Specifies on which page the clips created by protocols are stored When a page is full clips are stored on the next page Only clips created on this page and the other protocol pages if the first page is full are visible for protocols Values 1 to 10 0 Default value 6 3 Multicam Configuration 249 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Playlist Receive page Introduction This setting is linked to the copy function that allows users to automatically create a local copy of all network clips when copying a local or network playlist For details refer to the description of the Playlist copy function in the Operations manual Availability The setting is only available if the license code 111 or 112 is valid Description Specifies on which page s of your EVS server the clips received when using the PLST CLIPS copy function must be stored Clip pages can be assigned simultaneously as PUSH and PLST Receive Pages Values 1 to 10 0 Default value 0 page 10 Timeline Receive page Description Specifies on which page s the clips automatically created in timeline mode as part of the timeline editing process are stored Values 1 to 10 0 Default value 0 page 10 3 9 5 Playlist Settings User Interface The Playlist sett
52. are described in the table below Setting Description IP Address Specifies the IP address to connect to the port 1 of the MTPC board on the server The IP addresses 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 are not allowed Subnet Mask Specifies the range of logical addresses within the address space assigned to the MTPC board connection Default Specifies the IP address of the router on the network that the MTPC Gateway board can use as an access point to external networks How to Set the LAN PC To set up the LAN PC on the EVS server proceed as follows 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press L to call the Set LAN PC address command The following window opens PC Lan IP Address 661 661 626 624 Subnet Mask 255 255 660 600 Default Gateway 192 168 623 661 ENTER apply the new address ESC z quit without saving 2 Inthis window type the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Use the TAB key to move from one field to the other 3 Press ENTER to validate the definition of the LAN PC settings The LAN PC settings will automatically be taken into account when you launch a configuration line 2 3 5 Setting the Server Date and Time Introduction The Set Date and Time command allows you to adjust the system time amp date from the Multicam Setup window in the server based application This is not available in the web based interface Q Note q When you have just launched a configuration a window displaying the
53. based on the EVS video server structure The LSM ID is made up of 3 digits and 1 letter for example 112B where the digits and letter represent the following elements in the server structure Page Clip a 1 12B 0 2 D Nei humdi Bank cal The digits after the LSM ID correspond to the Net Number of the server on which the clip is stored i e the EVS video server ID on the XNet network They are not part of the LSM ID UmID The UmID is an 8 bytes ID with fixed length It is used for the unique clip identification on the SDTI network VarID The VarlD is a 32 bytes ID with variable length and format The following VarlD parameters need to be set up e Length 8 bytes 32 bytes e Format ASCII binary e Uniqueness level local server level global network level e Protocol visibility list of Net Numbers of the servers q Note q The VarlD allows a redundant architecture where the VarlD can be identical on two different servers All servers can stay on the same SDTI network Consequently this does not require a full replication of the XNet network With the UmID the full replication was necessary as this clip ID has to be unique on the XNet network 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 7 4 Sony BVW Settings User Interface The Sony BVW settings allow specifying the settings that will be used with the Sony BVW 75 protocol These fields are available in the
54. be changed by editing this external file In case of error or undefined values the corresponding parameter default value is used If any of the VarlD settings does not correspond to the network defined values set on the XNet the server will be disconnected from the network and operate in local mode In this case e The Multicam Configuration window clearly displays the message Not XNet common value next to the incorrect parameter e A message is displayed on the SDTI network monitoring screen indicating the incorrect parameter 226 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si VarID Configuration File The VarlD parameters are defined in a configuration file This file named varid ini is located inthe C LSMCE DATA directory The file has the following syntax 1 en A A A 2 ETETETT EEEIEE IETA VARID settings r Parameter values and default Uniqueness Local or Global Length 32 or 8 Format ASCII or Binary 7 Visibility 1 29 default empty is converted to local XT Net number 7 for all XNet 7 r Uniqueness Local Length 32 Format ASCII J 2 3 4 5 6 Uniqueness Description Specifies whether the VarlD will be unique at the XNet network level or at the EVS server level This parameter is valid with VDCP AVSP and LinX protocols Values e Global the VarlD is unique at the XNet network level e Local the VarlD is unique at the E
55. command allows you to switch the video display from and to one of the following modes e VGA mode B amp W video mode This mode sends a video CVBS output on the VGA connector which allows the VGA screen to be displayed on a standard composite video monitor using the VGA lt gt BNC adapter provided with the unit 4 Note q When a configuration has been launched you can still switch from one mode to the other with ALT BACKSPACE How to Change the Default Output Pressing E allows you to toggle from one mode to the other and so changing the default output mode The parameter displayed on the Multicam Setup window corresponds to the active value This means that when the parameter displayed is Default to VGA the active mode is the VGA mode Configuring Server Raids Introduction When the EVS server is started the server raids are automatically detected and built based on the default settings described in the Default Raid Configuration section below You can view the default raid configuration and modify it from the Raid Configuration window This window is only available in the server based application Q Note q Only hard disk drives from EVS can be used as they are specifically configured to work with EVS video servers 29 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 30 Overview on the Raid Configuration Window The Raid Configuration window is available from the Multicam Setup window when p
56. configuration lines You can change them as explained below In the Server Based Application To rename the configuration line in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted 2 Press CTRL F1 The line if highlighted in pink and the cursor blinks on the first character 3 Type the new name for the configuration line taking the following into account The space bar allows you to delete the selected character The LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys allow you to move the cursor position on the line 4 Press ENTER to validate the new name The new name is assigned to the configuration line and reflected in all user interfaces In the Web Based Interface To rename the configuration line in the web based interface proceed as follows 1 Click the Rename button next to the configuration line you want to rename 2 Inthe Rename dialog box type the new configuration name 3 Click OK The new name is assigned to the configuration line and reflected in all user interfaces EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 2 5 Exporting and Importing Configuration Lines How to Export Configuration Lines q Note L The screenshots in this section features configuration names which are examples and may not reflect configurations supported on your EVS server In th
57. connection interface both primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled However only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full 1080p configurations 3 2 9 General Information on 4K Configurations Description The 4K format available on the EVS server is called UHDTV Ultra High Definition TV It is activated by setting the UHDTV 4K value for the Resolution parameter In 4K the image resolution is 3840 x 2160 A 4K image consists of four 1080p frames transported via four 3G SDI links Each 4K image therefore requires 4 physical channels in the EVS server Requirements The 4K is available when the following hardware requirements are met e The XT3 server is fitted with H3X and V3X boards e The V3X boards have V3X modules with a serial number 2 1300 e The V3X base is a A4 revision with a serial number 2 4130 e The EVS server is equipped with SAS HDD disks with revision 10K 5 3 Multicam Configuration 111 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 112 The 4K is available when the following software requirements are met e The license code 27 is granted on the EVS server The Resolution parameter is set to UHDTV 4K See section Video and Reference Settings on page 119 The Intra Codec parameter is set to DNxHD forced value See section Codec Settings on page 123 e The 3G Dual parameter is set to a 3G value The No value is automatically excluded
58. control the given play or record channel Values For a controller to be available in the list of values it must first be assigned to an RS422 port in the port settings In addition rules specific to each controller apply to the assignment of the controller used alone or in combinations with other controllers to play or and record channels See section Rules for Controller Assignment on page 152 for more information An error message will be displayed to warn you in case of a wrong protocol selection or protocol combination and the fields that contain errors will be highlighted in red 150 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Sec ctrl Secondary Controller Description Name of the main device controller allowed to control the given play or record channel Values For acontroller to be available in the list of values it must first be assigned to an RS422 port in the port settings In addition rules specific to each controller apply to the assignment of the controller used alone or in combinations with other controllers to play or and record channels See section Rules for Controller Assignment on page 152 for more information An error message will be displayed to warn you in case of a wrong protocol selection or protocol combination and the fields that contain errors will be highlighted in red Mode Description Specifies how the control on the given play or record chann
59. e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T4 1 The following screenshot displays the OSD settings on the Monitoring tab in the web based interface Genlock Error Description Enables or disables the Genlock information display on the output monitor If the Genlock reference is not correct the GkV message appears on the output monitor Values Yes default No 3 Multicam Configuration 207 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 6 4 208 Disk Error Description Enables or disables the disk error information display on the output monitor As the server is equipped with a RAID disk array the operation can continue seamlessly even with 1 faulty disk If 1 disk is disconnected during operation the Raid message appears on all output monitors and another message appears when the operator shuts down the application to invite him to replace the disk and rebuild the RAID array Please refer to the Technical Reference manual for details on the RAID system and its maintenance Values Yes default No Network error Description Enables or disables the network error information display on the output monitor If there is an problem with the network connection the Net message appears on the output monitor When the network is available again the system will try to reconnect and the Net message appears on the output monitor Values Yes default No Clip name Description Specifies
60. eee eee eee eee 276 3 9 15 Special Effects Settings 00000 00 eee ee eee eeeeeee 278 4 MONITORING aaan ccc ccc ccc eee cece annaa nananana 284 4 1 Server Monitoring 00000000 cocoon e aaraa arana nannan 284 4 1 1 Overview on Server Monitoring Windows 2 0 2 2222 22 284 4 1 2 General Information Window 2 22222222cccceeeeeeeeeeeee 285 4 1 3 Raid and Disk Status Window 022222222 c cece cece cece eeeee 287 4 1 4 Timecode Status Window 02 22222 cc cece cece cece ceceeeeeeeees 290 4 1 5 Timecode Monitoring Window 000 000 c cece cece eee 292 4 1 6 Log Management 0 0 002222 e cece cece cece cece ceceeeeees 293 4 2 SDTI Network Monitoring 00000 000 ee cece cece eeeeeeeeee 295 4 2 1 Overview on SDTI Network Monitoring Windows 295 4 2 2 SDTI Network Schema 0 222222222 cece cece cece ccceeeeeceeees 295 4 2 3 Hardware Error Counters 02 2222 cc cece cece cece cccceeeecceeees 297 4 2 4 Disconnecting a Machine from the XNet Network 2 297 5 PROTOCOLS pinot eee edie ie oe 10102110 299 5 1 Introduction 2 2 0 2 2222 E cece cece ce aE RGS 299 v EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 VI 2S SONY BV WWD inh cre e nies hse ee A a a Na 299 53 OME NDD Boy tn eo era Ci els SOR Bes tack Nh nal anny p
61. features you can receive the license keys from EVS in the form of aXxxxxx COD file xxxxx serial number of the server for which this file has been calculated You need to apply this file to the EVS server from the Option codes management window e a license code that you can type in the Option codes management window Once the license codes have been entered the corresponding options or features are automatically active when you launch a configuration without having to reboot the server How to Enter License Codes from a COD File In the Server Based Application To enter a new license code delivered via a COD file proceed in one of the following ways 1 Copy the COD file ona USB key that you connect to the USB port of the EVS server 2 From the Multicam Setup window press O to open the Options codes management window 3 Press simultaneously ALT U keys OR 1 Copy manually the COD file to the C drive of the EVS server 2 Inthe Multicam Setup menu press O to open the Options codes management window 3 Press simultaneously ALT F keys The license codes will be read from the COD file and updated into the system Next to the line corresponding to the code the license type and the expiration date if any are displayed 35 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 In the Web Based Interface To enter a new license code delivered via a COD file proceed as follows 1 Copy the COD file
62. from 3 to 8 For mono channels 1 and 2 the default mapping has been changed as follows e The audio mono channel 1 of the A V material is sent to the mono channel 2 of the play channel and this for all play channels The audio mono channel 2 of the A V material is sent to the mono channel 1 of the play channel and this for all play channels Advanced audio settings Embedded outputs gt OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OuUT4 PGM1i PGM2 PGM3 PGM4 Default Mapping for Audio Inputs and Outputs Introduction The tables below present the channel mapping for audio inputs and outputs in the following configuration e XT36U chassis e Maximum number of recorders or players See section General Information on Supported Configurations on page 59 e Audio hardware configuration 4 DB15 Analog 16 BNC Digital In configurations with less recorders or players the irrelevant rows or columns should be disregarded 3 Multicam Configuration 173 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 174 Audio Embedded Inputs Issue 12 05 D January 2015 By default the audio embedded mono channels from the source material are mapped as shown in the table below onto the A V material stored on the EVS server The table shows the maximum number of players and an audio configuration with 16 tracks mono channels Mono1 Mono2 Mono3 Mono4 Mono5 Mono6 Mono7 Mono Mono9 Mono10 Mono11 Mono12 Mono13 Mono14 Mono15 Mono16 OUT 1 E1 01 E1 02 E1 03
63. hypermotion cameras is recorded on the camera buffer and then ingested into the EVS server when the operator sends a play command to the hypermotion camera The A V material from supermotion and ultramotion cameras is ingested into the EVS server through one physical record channel per phase whereas the A V material from the hypermotion camera is ingested into the EVS server through one physical record channel See section Hypermotion Management on page 274 for more information on the configuration related to hypermotion cameras Introduction The feeds from supermotion and ultramotion cameras can directly be ingested into EVS servers The camera s number of phases directly determines the number of physical record channels used on the EVS server A two phase camera will use two physical record channels primary or secondary channel with V3X a three phase camera will use three physical record channels and so on For supermotion two phase or six phase cameras you can use a 3G SDI connection single cable to connect your camera to both physical channels of a codec module primary and secondary channels at a time Limitation When working with an SLSM configuration in multi essence Intra LongGOP the Intra codec records all phases and the LongGOP codec records only the regular speed content not SLSM from phase 1 3 Multicam Configuration 67 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Conditions CEI SLS
64. interface Mix on one channel Description Enables disables mixing on a single codec module by means of the secondary link of the codec module J3 of a play channel This function applies to mixes in playlists not in timelines The license code 31 is required for the Mix on One Channel feature to be available Mix on One Channel is available for all controllers Remote Panel or protocol and with all codecs and resolutions except in 1080p Values Yes No default Audio Audio and Audio Monitoring Settings User Interface The Audio settings allow users to specify among others the physical configuration for audio connectors and the number of audio tracks The Audio Monitoring settings allow users to specify which audio signals are monitored These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 2 on the server based application onthe web based interface e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 X 3 Multicam Configuration a V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si The following screenshot displays the Audio settings and Audio Monitoring settings defined on the Channels tab in the web based interface Audio Connectors Description Type of connectors available in the hardware configuration The audio formats available on the EVS server and in the Advanced audio settings pages depend on the au
65. is applied and no teaming is provided e LACP The Link Aggregation Control Protocol is used to provide teaming Adapter Fault Tolerance The Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT method is used to provide teaming e Switch Fault Tolerance The Switch Fault Tolerance SFT method is used to provide teaming Default Value None Gigabit IP Configuration Introduction The Gigabit IP Configuration settings specify the IP addresses for the Gigabit connections on the Gigabit H3X board or on the 10GbE board depending on which GbE connections are specified in the Physical Interface parameter in the Gigabit Connection settings Warning Changes to the Gigabit settings require an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows to be applied User Interface The Gigabit IP Configuration settings are available e inthe Multicam Configuration window Network tab in the basic and advanced display modes on page 1 in the server and web based interface e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T3 X The following screenshot displays the Gigabit IP Configuration settings on the Network tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration 197 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Gigabit Connection Problems When the Gigabit module is not present on the H3X board or when the Gigabit connection has been lost the first line of the Gigabit IP Configuration settings displays the message Not dete
66. is valid Description Allows users to edit clips on the whole SDTI network Values The following values are possible Default value No Yes Other users on the network can trim rename delete etc your clips or modify the keywords and ranking assigned to your clips No Only the local operators can modify or delete clips on the server and edit their metadata Confirm delete clips playlists Description Values Default Values Enables a confirmation request when users delete clips playlists or in both situations Off The following values are possible Off Clips and playlists are immediately deleted Clips A confirmation is required for a clip deletion but not fora playlist deletion Playlists A confirmation is required for a playlist deletion but not for a clip deletion Clips amp Playlists A confirmation is required both for a playlist deletion and for a clip deletion q Note q This parameter does not apply to the Clear Video Disks command available in the Multicam Setup window of the server based application which already has its own confirmation message 258 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 9 8 Keywords Settings User Interface The Keywords settings allow the management of keywords on the EVS server These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic d
67. of representations are available by disk number or by raid number Users can change the option by using the Spacebar the plus and minus keys as well as the arrow keys 4 Monitoring eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sa Disk Display This represents each disk by its number in the array or gray dashes if not present and uses acolor code to display its status Disks Status 01 EXT4 D9 10 Ti 12 13 1233 EXT3 09 10 11 EXT2 D9 30 11 212 193 14 15 3 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 i a n ov gt amp i oOo 7 31 31 1 www Ww oO oO The external arrays can contain up to 24 disks with a minimum of 5 disks The internal arrays organization can be as follows one array of 6 disks on array of 12 disks two arrays with 6 disks each See section Raid Status on page 287 for more information on the raid status Raid Display This represents each disk by the raid number it is included in or gray dashes if not present and uses a color code to display the disk status Spare disks are represented by the letters sp Disks Status 01 EXT4 EXT3 12 12 12 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 EXT2 09 09 09 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 03 04 04 04 04 04 05 05 05 05 05 07 07 lm Fi gt Re 3 How to Highlight the Disks of a Raid The Highlight Raid field makes it possible to highlight with a light gray background the disks belonging to the raid number specified on the right of th
68. or 121 Sony BVW75 code 118 XtenDD35 code 118 Odetics and Odetics FK code 119 VDCP and VDCP Fk code 119 EVS AVSP code 120 or 121 Edit Rec code 122 LinX code 123 Default On port 1 only IPDP q Note q Odetics FK and VDCP FK are not available directly from the Port setting but when the Odetics or VDCP protocols are assigned to an RS422 port the Fill and Key modes are available on the Main Ctrl field in the Channels and Control settings Channels and Control Settings User Interface The Channel and Control settings mainly allow specifying which controllers main and possibly secondary have the hand on which play or record channels These fields are available in the following interfaces inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 1 on the server and web based interfaces e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 3 to T2 6 3 Multicam Configuration 149 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 The following screenshot displays the Channel and Control settings defined on the Channels tab in the web based interface Name Description User defined name for play or record channel This name will be used for the OSD and in the IPDirector application suite The name can contain maximum 24 characters Main ctrl Main Controller Description Name of the main device controller allowed to
69. or 3G IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec SLSM REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 3x oo wee oso gt RRR 108 3 Multicam Configuration a V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example 3D Dual Link 1SLSM 3x 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3D Dual Link configuration 1SLSM 3PH 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below IN6 OUT 1 Se eee 5 OUT 2 SS eee n OUT 3 Eee 4 pe oars 5 ae 1 T REC REC REC A 13A 1 2A 1 1A J8 J8 IN6B U5 ie IN5B U5 IN 4B U5 IN 3B 05 IN 2B U5 IN1B U8 Dual Link CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 7 REC REC REC N 1 3B 1 2B 1 1B A CHAR our our 1B CHAR our our 2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT our es SDIHD SDIHD SD HD SD HD SD HD RRA RARA RRR J4 J3 J4 J3 Nte 20200000000 q In an equivalent configuration with a 3G interface only the J8 connectors are cabled However the primary and secondary channels on the codec module of the V3X board are both used Available SLSM 3x Configurations in 1080p The tables below show the available and 1080p configurations with SLSM 3 Phase cameras on a XT3 6U serv er They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid what
70. play and record channel combinations The green cells refer to allowed assignments the red ones to banned assignments Numbers in the cells refer to the notes mentioned below the table 3 Multicam Configuration 153 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Odetics VDCP z Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 F amp K F amp K LinX Main Controller 2 PGM gt 2 PGM 1 PGM 1REC 1 REC gt 1REC Several PGM 1 REC Several PGM Several REC Secondary Controller gt 2 PGM 1 PGM 1REC 1 REC Several PGM 1REC Several PGM Several REC 1 The recorder cannot be controlled by a secondary controller in exclusive mode In these cases the recorder must be standalone or in parallel mode 2 Only with AirBox as main controller Protocol Used in Parallel Mode The table shows whether or not the given protocol used in parallel mode as a main secondary or mix controller can be assigned to the specified number of play channels record channels or play and record channel combinations The green cells refer to allowed assignments the red ones to banned assignments Numbers in the cells refer to the notes mentioned below the table Odetics VDCP Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 F amp K F amp K LinX 1 PGM 2 PGM 154 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sj Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 Say
71. refresh the SDTI network schema e Pressing RIGHT ARROW to display the second SDTI network monitoring window From this window you can also disconnect the Xhub branch on which the EVS server is located from the network See section Disconnecting a Machine from the XNet Network on page 297 for more information Hardware Error Counters The second page of the SDTI monitoring section provides a list of the hardware devices present on the SDTI network sorted by serial number with error counters information SDTI NETWORK MONITORING SDTI Sn PruSn Name CpLk Frm Mb TimeOut 629836 626416 XT2_PGE 66606 AHAHA 37 L5 626416 073130 XT 2 66606 86080 37 5 073130 629836 XFile 66666 86006 37 6 trl Alt L Disconnect KHub branch from network Scroll 172 gt Change Page PgUpDn Scroll Page S S Serial Sort Return Rst Stat Space Pause In operating conditions when all machines are connected the CpLk electrical quality of the network and Frm checksum on the packets counters should not increase at all At the contrary the counters will increase during disconnection connection of to the network Disconnecting a Machine from the XNet Network Introduction From the Monitoring section page 2 you can disconnect from the XNet network the XHub branch the EVS server your are working on is connected to This can be useful when setting up an SDTI network or troubleshooting an SDTI network issue 297 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue
72. system date and time gives you another opportunity to modify these parameters 2 Multicam Setup 27 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 28 Supported Formats The supported date format is DD MM YYYY as shown in the example below e 15 03 2011 for March 15 2011 The supported time format is hh mm ss as shown in the example below e 22 58 00 for 22 h 58 min 00 sec 24 hour display A warning message will inform you if the format you try to use is not valid How to Set the System Date and Time To set up the system date and time from the Multicam Setup window proceed as follows 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press T to call the System date and time command The following window opens System Date amp Time Date CDD MM YYYY gt 07 40 09 Time j 46 ENTER apply ESC gt quit without saving 2 Inthis window type the date in the DD MM YYYY format o the time in the hh mm ss format 24 hour display using TAB to move from one field to the other 3 Press ENTER to apply the changes to the system date and time The date and time you have entered here will automatically be taken into account when you launch a configuration 2 Multicam Setup Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 3 6 2 3 7 2 Multicam Setup Setting the Default Output To VGA Video Introduction Between the PC boot and the I O boot the video driver is loaded The Default Output to VGA Video
73. tab in the basic display mode on page 5 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel page 10 1 Warning The cam mapping feature and setting are only available if the license code 126 which allows the mapping of additional cameras is valid The following screenshot displays the Cam Mapping settings on the Operation tab in the server based interface CONFIGURATION XT_ADL 5 LSM 2REC 4PLAY NOT RUNNING 1 SERVER 2 CHANNELS 3 NETWORK 4 MONITORING 5 PROTOCOL 6 GPI 5 6 Basic Mode Cam Mapping Authorize cam mapping No Cam C Only editable if Multicam is running Cam D Only editable if Multicam is running HYPE PNUT LON CUNnCrUT Ter Hypermotion No Recorder CAM A Remote mode Hypermotion only Port RS422 6 Dial Speed 16x ALT A Apply F3 Basic Advanced Ese Quit PgUp PgDn Change page Fi Help Mapping of Network Cameras This feature allows the mapping of network cameras to unused camera positions on the remote up to the last D camera The mapping allows a quick selection of network trains on the network Nevertheless please note that these cameras are NOT recorded on the local server they remain recorded on their respective destination servers For example ina 2IN 2OUT configuration the cameras C and D are not used and thus is possible to map up to 2 network cameras CamAandCamB are local cameras 3 Multicam Configuration 273
74. used configuration line will then be launched automatically after a five seconds delay the next time the EVS server will be restarted If you want to change the configuration line to be launched you need to rapidly hit a key on the keyboard connected to the EVS server within five seconds after the Multicam Setup window has been displayed Then the Multicam Setup window will stay open and let you select another configuration Editing a Configuration How to Edit a Configuration Introduction When the operator hits a key on the keyboard connected to the EVS server within five seconds if the automatic launch of a configuration is active the Multicam Setup window stays open and the operator can select and enter the selected configuration to edit it 16 configurations lines are available on an EVS server A default configuration is defined behind all configuration lines even if no name is assigned to the configuration line Each configuration line contains all configuration parameters which allow a very flexible configuration of the EVS server EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 In the Server Based Application To edit a configuration line in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted Press F8 The Configuration window opens See section Multicam
75. workflow The Gigabit prioritization settings allow users to prioritize the transfer from to the Gigabit FTP server Warning e Changes to the Gigabit Prioritization settings require an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows to be applied e When the Truck Manager is used in a given workflow it automatically configures the Gigabit Prioritization settings to take into account the connection needs of all EVS products in the workflow User Interface The Gigabit Prioritization settings are available inthe Multicam Configuration window Network tab in the advanced display modes on page 2 in the server based interface and in the web based interface The following screenshot highlights the Gigabit prioritization settings on the Network tab in the web based interface General Description The prioritization settings consists in giving priority to a number of Lo Res Proxy connections on the Gigabit network Based on the effective bandwidth on the Gigabit interfaces of the EVS server Multicam calculates the maximum number of Lo Res connections that can be granted with priority Knowing the maximum number of connections which can have priority the administrator can set the requested number of reserved connections for critical jobs Lo Res browsing for example The unreserved connections will be available for less prioritary jobs backup of clips to be archived for example 3 Multicam Configuration 199
76. x x x IN3 OUT4 Prim Sec Ch Ch gt z Dg Be x x x V5 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch 81 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 AREG Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec z SRECI Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 2 4 0 a a bee ia i i D or r ie 3 1 0 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 0 3 2 1 3 3 0 4 0 0 4 0 1 wooo ae i be eae 82 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example 1x3G SLSM 2PH 2 REC 2 PLAY MIX The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels ina 3G SLSM configuration with 1x3G SLSM 2PH 2REC 2PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below On the codec module of the V3X board used both primary and secondary channels are used for each 3G SLSM REC IN6 OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 OUT 4 OUT5 IN 1 OUT 6 ier ed G arg REC 1 1 2 3G IN 6B u IN 5B u IN 4B u 4 IN 3B w IN 2B om IN 1B us CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD 1 CHAR SD J1 J6 J6 J6 out our 1B CHAR our our 2B CHAR our our 3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUTS5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SDHD ry o J3 B J3 Example 3x3G SLSM 2PH 2 REC 1 PLAY MIX XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configura
77. 0 Mbps Default 100 100 100 111 100 50 bitrate Horizontal 960 960 960 1920 1440 1920 Resoluti Rectal tay 1152 1152 1280 1280 1280 1372 1372 1372 1440 1440 1440 1536 1536 1536 1600 1600 1600 1920 1920 1920 default default default AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes 120 185 185x 10b 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ Bitrate 1 120 121 185 121 185 85 120 185 Mbps Default 120 184 184 85 120 185 bitrate Horizontal 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 Resolution 3 Multicam Configuration 131 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080i 59 94 Hz Codec Bitrate Mbps Default bitrate Horizontal Resolution Codec Bitrate Mbps Default bitrate Horizontal Resolution 132 HD Mjpeg EVS 20 260 100 960 1152 1280 1372 1440 1536 1600 1920 default AVID DNxHD 145 1 145 145 1920 HD Mjpeg Standard 20 260 100 960 1152 1280 1372 1440 1536 1600 1920 default AVID DNxHD 220 146 220 220 1920 HD Mpeg AVC Intra 100 2 Intra 20 260 100 960 1152 1280 1372 1440 1536 1600 1920 default AVID DNxHD 220x 10b 146 220 220 1920 111 111 1920 Apple ProRes 422 LT 102 102 1920 DVCPro HD 100 100 1280 Apple ProRes 422 SQ 145 145 1920 XDCAM HD 50 50 1920 Apple Pro
78. 0 260 20 260 20 260 111 100 50 Mbps Default 100 100 100 111 100 50 bitrate Horizontal 640 640 640 1280 960 1280 Resolution 768 768 768 960 960 960 1024 1024 1024 1280 1280 1280 default default default AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes 145 220 220x 10b 422 LT 422 422 HQ Bitrate Mbps 1 145 146 220 146 220 102 145 220 Default bitrate 145 220 220 102 145 220 Horizontal 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 Resolution Note The dynamic bitrate management system modifies compression tables for each recorded field to keep the bitrate of the encoded stream as close as possible to the target A higher bitrate means better picture quality and less storage capacity but a higher bandwidth is required Improper values can exceed disks performance causing frozen pictures during playback Warning Some video formats allowed on an XT3 server create clips that are not compatible with previous hardware revisions When an incompatible format is selected a warning will be issued at application startup In addition the video format information displayed on the Server tab of the Multicam Configuration window indicates any incompatible information 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080i 50 Hz Cone nee Nine HD Mpeg AVC DVCPro XDCAM EVS Standard 2 Intra Intra 100 HD HD Bitrate 20 260 20 260 20 260 111 100 5
79. 1 REC REC 4 3 J6 J6 J6 J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 F J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 p J3 i J4 i J3 J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i 3 Multicam Configuration 85 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Available SLSM 4 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 4 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 6U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec re PREG EEAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch te a i ie E aii C aia O Ee fl ie ie 1 JO XREC configurations 7s BRR Example 1xSLSM 4PH 3REC 2PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1XxSLSM 4PH 3REC 2PLAY in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below IN6 OUT 1 IN 5 OUT 2 IN OUT 4 IN2 OUTS5 an ce IN 6B w IN 5B w IN 4B u IN 3B w IN 2B u IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 ey ae may CHAR our f our 1B CHAR our our 2B CHAR ouT out 3B CHAR ouT our 4B CHAR
80. 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT Remote Panel Assignment In setups where several LSM Remote Panels and a hypermotion camera are defined the assignment of the various PGMs and hypermotion camera to the LSM Remote Panels is automatically performed as shown in the table below depending on the number of PGMs in the selected channel configuration the selected Remote Mode Hypermotion only or Hypermotion LSM e the number of Remote Panels available The following table presents the possible configurations 1 2 3 4 Hyperm Hyperm Hyperm Hyperm Hyperm Hyperm Hyperm Hyperm Only LSM Only LSM Only LSM Only LSM NA R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 NA NA NA NA NA hyperm R2 hyperm NA R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 NA NA NA PGM2 PGM2 R2 PGM2 R2 PGM2 hyperm R2 hyperm R3 hyperm hyperm NA R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 NA PGM2 PGM2 PGM2 PGM2 R2 PGM2 R2 PGM2 PGM3 PGM3 R2 PGM3 R2 PGM3 R3 PGM3_ R3 PGM3 hyperm R2 hyperm R3 hyperm R4 hyperm hyperm hyperm NA R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 R1 PGM1 PGM2 PGM2 PGM2 PGM2 PGM2 PGM2 R2 PGM2 PGM3 PGM3 PGM3 R2 PGM3 R2 PGM3 R2 PGM3 R3 PGM3 hyperm R2 R2 PGM4 PGM4 R3 PGM4 R3 PGM4 R4 PGM4 hyperm hyperm R3 hyperm R4 hyperm OR hyperm hyperm R1 PGM1 PGM2 R2 PGM3 PGM4 hyperm PGM1 PGM2 can represent the 2PGMs mode as well as the PGM PRV mode Warning The cel
81. 12 05 D January 2015 298 This feature is only possible when using a XHub from version 3 03 How to Disconnect a Machine from the XNet Network To disconnect a machine from the server proceed as follows 1 Press SHIFT F4 to access the SDTI Network Monitoring window 2 Press CTRL ALT L to disconnect the XHub branch from the network The following warning is displayed The network branch you are connected on will be disconnected from the network All network actions will be disabled 3 Click ENTER to confirm that you want to disconnect the XHub branch from the network On the SDTI Network Monitoring window the following message in red font informs that the machine is disconnected and how it can be connected again XHub branch disconnected from the network Press CTRL ALT L to reconnect 4 Monitoring ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 5 Protocols 5 1 Introduction The EVS servers can be controlled by several protocols This section will describe briefly the supported protocols The purpose of this description is not to be exhaustive but to give a quick overview of the protocols capabilities and the function supported 5 2 Sony BVW75 Protocol Capabilities This Sony protocol is able to e use the transport command e get the channel status e get the channel TC Characteristics Bitrates 38 4 kilobits s Command Construction MSD LSD s CMD 1 loapa CMD 2
82. 12 05 Si Glossary Multicam Setup window Initial Window in the server based and web based Multicam Setup application that is displayed when the EVS server is not running a given configuration yet It gives access to the configuration lines defined on the EVS server and to the commonly used maintenance tools Multi Essence configuration EVS server configuration that allows multiple and simultaneous encoding of the video materal into the server Intra XDCAM is an example of a multi essence configuration O Operational Setup menu Menu accessible on the Remote Panel using the SHIFT D keys form the main menu It allows users to define operational parameters OSD Abbreviation for on screen display P Physical channel See also Channel Play channel or Player Codec module used as a player R Record channel or Recorder Codec module used as a recorder S SDTI network EVS proprietary network that allows users to view and share the content of interconnected EVS video servers XNet network is used as synonym for SDTI network Server Based Multicam Setup application Server Based application used to set up and configure the EVS servers The short form is Server Based application in this user manual This is accessible from the EVS Server itself when it has been started SLSM camera Also called Supermotion cameras These are cameras that record at a frame rate 2 3 4 or 6 times higher than the normal fram
83. 1B CHAR ouT ouT 1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD PLAY 2B J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 Available 1080p Configurations The tables below show the 1080p configurations with standard cameras on a XT3 4U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 0 2 1 2 2 2 0 3 1 3 3 Multicam Configuration 95 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 1080p 3G 2REC 2PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 1080p 3G configuration 2REC 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below With the full 1080p only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used IN 4 OUT 1 IN 3 OUT 2 IN 2 OUT 3 PLAY PLAY REC ie 1 2 2 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B 5 4 IN 1B w CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 J6 CHAR our our 1B CHAR ouT our 2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR ouT our 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 E J4 J3 p J4 E J3 p J4 E J3 _ q Note q In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface both primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled H
84. 1D A0 1F A0 23 A0 24 A0 25 A0 26 A0 2C B0 02 Command 8 bytes ID mode 00 15 Delete Protect 00 16 Undelete Protect 10 00 Stop 10 01 Play 10 02 Record 10 04 Still 10 05 Step 10 06 Continue 10 07 Jog 10 08 Var Play 20 1D Rename ID 20 1E Preset Standard Time 20 1F New Copy 20 20 Sort Mode 20 21 Close Port 20 22 Select Port 20 23 Record Init 20 24 Play Cue 20 25 Cue With Data 20 26 Delete ID 20 29 Clear 20 2C Record Init With Data 20 43 Disk Preroll 30 01 Open Port 30 02 Next V5 Return 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 04 Ack 30 81 Port Opened B0 30 82 Next ID 305 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA VariD mode B0 03 BO 11 BO 14 B0 16 B0 18 B0 19 Command 8 bytes ID mode 30 03 Last 30 05 Port Status 30 06 Position Request 30 07 Active ID Request 30 08 Device Type Request 30 10 System Status Request 30 11 ID List 30 14 ID Size Request 30 16 ID Request 30 18 ID s Added List 30 19 ID s Deleted List Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Return BO0 30 83 Last ID 30 85 Status 30 86 Position B0 30 87 Active ID 30 88 Device Type 30 90 System Status B0 30 91 ID B0 30 94 ID Size B0 30 96 ID Characteristic B0 30 98 Added ID BO0 30 99 Deleted ID EVS adds some custom commands to the protocol in order to take advantage of the server potential Please contact
85. 2 05 D January 2015 3 9 11 EVS Controller Settings Introduction The EVS Controller settings gather Settings related to the behavior of the keys lever or jog of the Remote Panel Settings associated to XFile or the EVS server itself Warning Most of the settings are only available or applicable with base configurations associated to the use of an EVS Remote Panel LSM Remote XSense Remote User Interface These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 4 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface The following screenshot displays the EVS Controller settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface 266 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Effect duration for take Description Defines the duration of the transition when using the TAKE key to chain 2 sequences in PGM PRV mode Values Range of values OOsOOfr to 20sOOfr Default value 00sO5fr Fast jog Description Sets the increment of the jump when the Remote Panel is used in Fast Jog mode Values The values from 1 to 20 times are possible Default value 20x PGM Speed Var Max Availability The Var Max option is not available with XSense configurations Context During playback if PGM Speed or Var Max has been enabled in the secondary menu of the Remote Panel the lever r
86. 2TR REC 1 2TL REC REC 1 2BR 1 2BL J6 J J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR ouT our 2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR ouT our 4B CHAR our f our 5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD PLAY PLAY 1BL 1BR J4 33 J4 3 J4 33 J4 3 J4 J3 J4 33 3 Multicam Configuration 117 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 3 3 3 1 118 Server Tab Overview Server Tab The Server tab consists of a single page in the basic or advanced mode in the server based application It covers the settings related to video codecs and standards time reference phase definition interpolation activation and PC LAN Settings List The table below presents the settings of the Server tab It specifies whether the setting is available e inthe basic or advanced display mode in the server based and web based interfaces e inthe Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Setting Name Basic Advanced tS Sue Video and reference settings P1 P1 Field rate X X Resolution X x Aspect ratio X X LTC Timecode X X Sync PC Time to TC X Genlock X X Codec Settings P1 P1 Intra LongGOP Proxy Codec X Bitrate X X Horizontal Res Recorded Lines X Phase definition settings P1 T1 1 SD X X HD to SD SDI X X Interpolation settings P1 T1 2 Vertical interp X X 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 3 2 Setting Na
87. 3 q Note q In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface both primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled However only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full 1080p configurations Available SLSM 3x Configurations in 3D The tables below show the available 3D configurations with SLSM 3 Phase cameras on a XT3 4U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec sere REC SP CRy Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 Saas 0 SSS Ta T R e oe 3 Multicam Configuration 103 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Available SLSM 3x Configurations in 1080p The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 3 Phase cameras on a XT3 4U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec pa eS deo Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Available SLSM 4x Configurations in 1080p The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 4 Phase cameras ona XT3 4U server They sh
88. 3 Multicam Configuration V CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si ll The following screenshot shows the Timecode Insertion settings in SD on the Channels tab in the web based application The screenshot below shows the Timecode Insertion settings in HD on the Channels tab in the web based application In Loop D VITC The D VITC Digital Vertical Interval Timecode and userbits are always written on the monitoring SD outputs of the record codec and are the same as on the source video Lines Description Lines on which the VITC must be written on the output connectors of the record codec Values From 06 08 to 20 22 Default Values 14 16 in NTSC 19 21 in PAL 3 Multicam Configuration 185 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 186 HD OUT in HD Issue 12 05 D January 2015 HAnc LTC HAnc VITC Description Values Default value UserBits Description Values Enables disables the insertion of the embedded timecode HAnc LTC or HAnc VITC in the HD output The values specified for the HAnc LTC and HAnc VITC fields have to be the same The values can be as follows No No new timecode inserted in the output Pin Same timecode as in the input inserted in the output Timecode from the LTC table inserted in the LTC output e USER User defined timecode inserted in the output All HAnc LTC HAnc VITC timecodes generated in the video signal coming out of the given PGM will remain static and fixed to 00
89. 5 128 Defines the V value of the custom color that can be used with the Colour parameter 0 to 255 128 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Split screen tracking Availability This setting is available with a valid license code 113 anda compatible base configuration Description Enables or disables the auto tracking in the split screen mode Values Yes No Default value No Paint target OSD mon Availability This setting is available with a valid license code 114 or 115 a 8 bit codec and a compatible base configuration Description Specifies if the paint and target function use the SD or HD output Values SD HD Default value SD Q Note q This setting is also available without a valid license code 114 or 115 when Epsio Live is used The setting has to be set to HD to allow OSD management with Epsio Live CEMI Internal offside line Availability The internal offside line and related settings below are available with a valid license code 114 a 8 bit codec and a compatible base configuration Description Activates or deactivates the internal offside line feature and the access to the internal offside line menu with the SHIFT D key in the operational menu Values e Yes The SHIFT D gives access to the internal offside menu e No The SHIFT D key gives access to the secondary controller as usual Default value No 3 Multicam Configuration 281 EVS Broadcast Equi
90. 5 D January 2015 4 4 1 4 1 1 284 Monitoring Server Monitoring Overview on Server Monitoring Windows The Server Monitoring section is available by pressing SHIFT F5 from the operational windows on the VGA Q Note q This section is only available in the server based application It is not available from the web based interface It contains the pages shortly presented in the following table The page name in this table allows you to directly jump to the corresponding page Page Page Name Description 1 General Provides general system information and maintenance Information commands on the EVS server window 2 Raid and Disk Gives information on the disks or raids from internal Status window and or external storage 3 Timecode Status Gives information on the genlock analog LTC and window timecode statuses from the EVS server This page is also used to set up how the timecodes are managed in the timecode jump tables 4 Timecode Displays timecode information from recorders SD or Monitoring window HD 5 Log Management Allows a user friendly and easy management of the logs window 4 Monitoring eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 SS 4 1 2 General Information Window Introduction The page 1 in the Server Monitoring section General Information window provides system information on the EVS server as well as some maintenance commands SERVER MONITORING PAGE 1 System Information
91. 6 The codec used for the playout is the AVID DNxHD 145 ALT A Apply F3 Basic Advanced Esc Quit PgUp PgDn Change Web Based User Interface The following screenshot presents the 1S tab of the Multicam Configuration window of an XT3 server in the web based interface shown in basic mode e The top line displays the name of the selected configuration and specifies whether the configuration has been launched running or not not running e The selected tab is displayed in a lighter gray color e The Display mode basic or advanced is specified on the top line 3 Multicam Configuration 51 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 ES MULTICAM SOFTWARE _ SUPPORT CONFIGURATION RIGHTS RESERVED 2013 52 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 3 1 3 V5 Navigating and Editing in the Multicam Configuration Window In the Server Based Application Navigation Commands The following table presents the commands to navigate in the Multicam Configuration window Command description Selecting a given tab Moving from one tab to the other when the tab is selected i e rose highlighted Moving down up in the pages of the active tab Moving down in the list of editable settings Moving up in the list of editable settings Toggling between Basic and Advanced display mode Editing Commands Command key CTRL tab number LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW
92. A 3B RECs hee 2 2A 2 2B REC gt iREC 2 2A 2 2B REC REG 3A 3B REC IREGC 2 2A 2 2B RECs REG 3A 3B REC REG 2 2A 2 2B RECI REG 3A 3B REG REC IN3 OUT4 Prim Sec Ch Ch REC REC 2 1A 2 1B REC REC 2A 2B REC gt REC 2 1A 2 1B REC REC 2A 2B REGS REG 2 1A 2 1B RECs PREC 2 1A 2 1B REC REG 2A 2B REG PREG 2A 2B REG REC 2 1A 2 1B Rae ee 2A 2B REC REC 21A 2 18 REC on Bee 2A 2B REG REC 2A 2B REC REC 2 1A 2 1B REG REG 2A 2B V 5 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch RECH REG a IREG REC T2A T 2B aA es RECS REG RECT REG 2AT 2B AIMATA B RECS RECH IRECT REC 1 2A 1 2B 1 1A 1 1B RECH RECARE PREG eZee 12B TIA les REC RECH IRECTIREC T2A 2B 1A 4B RECH REC 2 Es REG 1 2A 1 2B 1 1A 1 1B RECA RECT IREGI Re T2A m 2B 11 gt 1 18 RECH RECH RECT IREG T2A el ES MIA TIITIB RECH RECH RECT REG 12A 1 2B ATIA T1B RECT Ge RECH IREG 12A 1 2B TIA TAIB REOG RECH REG REC T2A 2B a TAT TIB RECT RECT REG REG Te2A EZ Bee As a4 Bs RECH RECI Ets Wine 1 2A 1 2B 1 1A 1 1B RECO RECT REC REC 2A T28 RMA TITIB RECH REC RECs REG bed T K 2B GRATA ll RECH RECT REG REC 12A 1 2B TIA LIB RECA IRECHRECTIREC T2AT 2B I LIAT TIB REC RECT RECTIREC T2A 12B 11A 11B RECH RECI RECS IREG 1 2A 12B TIA 11B 105 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 3D Dual Link 1SLSM 2x 1REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recor
93. Areas General Description The Multicam Setup window is the window that opens first when the Multicam Setup application is launched It is displayed when the EVS server is started but does not run a given configuration yet The Multicam Setup window allows users to view and manage the various configuration lines e perform some administration and maintenance tasks on the EVS server e view summary information on the EVS server and the selected configuration line This is available in both server based and web based Multicam Setup applications Both user interfaces include the same features except that the Tools menu offers fewer commands in the web based user interface 2 Multicam Setup eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sj User Interfaces The Multicam Setup window contains six areas highlighted and described below These areas contain similar information in both web based and server based applications The following screenshot presents the Multicam Setup window in the server based application Multicam ETIT 12 5 SN 113570 Facility Name Tools CF7 CREATION DIST3 I lt m gt port configuration lines INTRA XDCAM NTSC Export configuration lines CDO NTSC Assign server facility name Import export keyword files ECx gt port log files lt O gt ptions codes management Hardware check CROAID configuration Set LOAN PC address Set date and lt t gt ime C gt lear video disks Touch Screen cal i gt brat
94. CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD T Available 3G SLSM 2 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 6U server server A single 3G cable transports both phases and is connected to the primary connector of the codec module on the rear panel This accounts for two channels on the V3X board The table shows the channel assignment at the level of the V3X board IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec oe ibe ZELAN Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 tt D fol eT BEE ft eee BA ft EEE E Ee e l mi a Bee ft Pe Bee ae my bal eae aie 1 0 1 80 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec SLSM REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch 2x 1 0 2 MIX MIX 1 2 1 0 3 MIX MIX 1 2 1 0 4 MIX MIX 1 2 1 1 1 MIX 1 1 1 2 MIX MIX 1 2 1 2 1 MIX 1 1 2 2 MIX MIX 1 2 1 3 1 MIX 1 2 0 1 MIX 1 2 1 1 MIX 1 2 0 2 MIX MIX 1 2 XREC configurations 1 1 4 MIX MIX q 2 1 2 3 MIX MIX 1 2 1 3 2 MIX MIX 1 2 2 0 3 MIX MIX 1 2 2 0 4 MIX MIX 1 2 2 1 2 MIX MIX 1 2 2 1 3 MIX MIX 1 2 2 2 2 MIX MIX 1 2 2 3 0 3 Multicam Configuration IN4 0UT3 Prim Sec Ch Ch M wz v OO gs Oe Ss Os C2 Se IX IX x x
95. CONFIGURATION MANUAL Version 12 05 January 2015 V5 Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Copyright EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Copyright 2011 2015 All rights reserved Disclaimer The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only and subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained in this user manual is accurate up to date and reliable EVS Broadcast Equipment cannot be held responsible for inaccuracies or errors that may appear in this publication Improvement Requests Your comments will help us improve the quality of the user documentation Do not hesitate to send improvement requests or report any error or inaccuracy on this user manual by e mail to doc evs com Regional Contacts The address and phone number of the EVS headquarters are usually mentioned in the Help gt About menu in the user interface You will find the full list of addresses and phone numbers of local offices either at the end of this user manual for manuals on hardware products or at the following page on the EVS website http www evs com contacts User Manuals on EVS Website The latest version of the user manual if any and other user manuals on EVS products can be found on the EVS download center on the following webpage http www evs com downloadcenter ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Table of Contents Tab
96. Configuration on page 47 to edit the configuration parameters When the configuration is defined for a given line press ALT A in the Configuration window to validate the changes Press ESC to come back to the Setup window In the Web Based Interface To edit a configuration line in the web based interface proceed as follows 1 Click the Edit icon VA for the configuration line you want to configure The Configuration window opens See section Multicam Configuration on page 47 to edit the configuration parameters When the configuration is defined for the given line click Apply to validate and then Quit to come back to the Setup window Invalid Configuration Invalid configuration lines are easily detected in the server based application When a configuration line becomes invalid a red exclamation mark lt gt is displayed next to the configuration line in both server based and web based interfaces CUE EEETUECEEE of Echo iostelee When the operator presses F8 to edit the configuration line in the server based application a popup window indicates the line is invalid When the operator acknowledges the message the pages including the invalid parameters are displayed with the invalid parameters selected 2 Multicam Setup ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 2 4 2 Multicam Setup Renaming Configuration Lines Introduction When the EVS server is delivered default names are assigned to the
97. D PLAY 1B J4 J33 J4 3 J4 J3 J4 3 Q Note q In an equivalent configuration with a 3G interface only the J8 connectors are cabled However the primary and secondary channels on the codec module of the V3X board are both used Available SLSM 2x Configurations in 1080p The table below shows the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 2 Phase cameras on a XT3 4U server The table shows the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC 7 Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec aor PREC retey Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 1 1 0 ql 2 0 2 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example 1080p 3G 1SLSM 2x 1REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G configuration 1SLSM 2PH 1REC 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below With the full 1080p only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used F SLSM 2PH A OU CODEC imams e CODEC ann v CODEC IN 3 OUT 2 IN 2 OUT 3 IN 1 OUT 4 oe a bes IN 4B 5 IN 3B u IN 2B u IN 1B w CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR ouT our 2B CHAR ouT our 3B CHAR out our 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J
98. EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 When processing jobs Multicam always makes use of the full available Gigabit bandwidth If the bandwidth is not fully allocated the remaining bandwidth is automatically distributed among the connections Configuration mode Description Values Default value Specifies whether and how you want to configure the priorities for the Gigabit connections Two configuration modes are available e Disabled The parameters for setting prioritization are hidden you cannot reserve connections gt The number of unreserved connections is automatically set to the maximum 25 connections Enabled o You can set the number of Lo Res connections The number of unreserved connections is computed and set automatically never lower than 6 Disabled Connections Lo Res Availability Description Values Default value 200 The setting is only available in Enabled configuration mode and if the Lo Res codec essence is active on the EVS server Allows configuring the number of Lo Res connections allowed to the bandwidth of the EVS server Each Lo Res connection has a priority profile optimized for a smooth browsing of Lo Res media without impacting other transfers The values is set in the Reserved column The number of remaining and maximum Lo Res connections for the given server configuration is specified in the Remain Max column 0 3 Multicam Con
99. EVS to know more about these commands 306 5 Protocols Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 6 6 1 Truck Manager Plugin Introduction Plugin Integration into Truck Manager This chapter describes the Multicam plugin for the Truck Manager application The Multicam plugin consists of a list of operational settings relevant for Multicam These settings are displayed in a specific area in the Truck Manager application in the lower part of the Configuration pane The Multicam plugin allows users to define and apply remotely the settings required for the Multicam application to be operational Plugin Delivery The plugin is delivered with the Multicam application The Truck Manager application automatically downloads the right plugin version when it connects to an EVS server for the first time on a given setup For this reason the version of the Truck Manager is not tied to a given plugin version of the Multicam application 6 Truck Manager Plugin 307 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 6 2 Plugin Overview Introduction Issue 12 05 D January 2015 The Multicam plugin contains the elements highlighted on the screenshot below Multicam S 1 Xplore Configuration name a Server Video Field rate Intra Codec AVID DNxHD 120 Inputs Base config SLSM REC Dual Port sett Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 t 4 Port 5 Port 6 Channel IN3 REC3 IN4 REC4 IN5 REC IN6 REC6 Audio se Number o
100. F LinX gt 2 PGM 1 REC gt 1 REC 1 PGM 1 REC Several PGM 1 REC Several PGM Several REC 1 Only with EditRec Rules for Controller Combinations Exclusive mode Play Channels The following table shows the supported protocol combinations in exclusive mode on play channels Secondary gt Odetics VDCP Primary v F amp K F amp K AVSP Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony Odetics DD35 EditRec LinX VDCP Sony Odetics DD35 EditRec LinX ower i VDCP F amp K 3 Multicam Configuration 155 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Exclusive mode REC Channels The following table shows the supported protocol combinations in exclusive mode on record channels Secondary gt Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony Odetics DD35 EditRec Linx Odetics VDCP Primary v F amp K F amp K Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony Odetics DD35 EditRec LinX Odetics F amp K VDCP F amp K N a Parallel mode Play Channels The following table shows the supported protocol combinations in parallel mode on play channels Secondary gt p A Odetics VDCP Primary v Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 LinX F amp K F amp K Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 LinX Odetics F amp K E VDCP F amp K 156 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Secondary gt Primary v Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Son
101. GbE ports and two 10GbE ports The 1GbE or 10GbE ports can be used from Multicam 12 05 to provide the internal Gigabit connection e The Gigabit H3X board is equipped with two 1GbE ports These ports can still be used to provide the Gigabit connection They however provide less bandwidth than the 1GbE connections on the 10GbE board e Anexternal gateway PC equipped with two 10GbE ports can be used when the EVS server is fitted with a PCle external connector q Note q Only the 1GbE connectors on the Gigabit Ethernet Connector module are currently available on XT3 4U servers T Warning Changes to the Gigabit Connection settings require an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows to be applied User Interface The Gigabit connection settings are available e inthe Multicam Configuration window Network tab in the basic and advanced display modes on page 1 in the server and web based interface e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T3 X Working Principles You can only use the 10GbE connections via an external gateway PC when the EVS server is equipped with a PCle external connector When you use an external gateway PC equipped with 10GbE ports you can use the Gigabit H3X connections on the EVS server but not at the same time When you use the 10GbE board you can use the 1GbE or the 10 GbE connections but not at same time 3 Multicam Configuration 195 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issu
102. HD with an XT3 4U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec res bal ee Eel Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 XREC configurations 1 0 2 Example 1xSLSM 4PH 1PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 1XxSLSM 4PH 1PLAY in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below IN 1 IN 4B 5 IN 3B a IN 2B us IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR ouT our 1B CHAR ouT our 2B CHAR ouT our 3B CHAR out our 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 p J4 J3 J4 J3 p 3 Multicam Configuration 75 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Available SLSM 6 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 4U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec sen alee eel Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch XREC configurations 1 0 1
103. Import export keyword file command The following dialog box opens Import Export Keywords Files Files on USB Files on Server ENNIS KWD Se CENTER Export to USB Press ENTER to export the keyword file from the EVS server to the USB key 4 Press OK to close the message box that appears when the keyword file has been exported 5 Remove the USB key Exporting Log Files When the EVS support team requests the log files to investigate an issue you can export the log files to a plugged in USB key by pressing the X shortcut key from the Multicam Setup window When you call the Export log file command a zip file is created on the root folder the USB key It contains e all files and folders located on C LSMCE DATA folder of the EVS server e an Excel spreadsheet that contains the definition of your configuration lines After the export action a message box asks you whether you want to delete the logs on the EVS server If you answer Yes the content of the folders C LSMCE DATA LOG and C LSMCE DATA DUMP are deleted You can also export log files from XNet Monitor For more information refer to the XNet Monitor user manual 2 Multicam Setup ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 3 1 3 1 1 Multicam Configuration Overview on User Interfaces Introduction Preliminary Remarks Configuration as Initial Step Prior to using Multicam the operator should set all n
104. In Reset 10 01 Ack A0 07 Preview OUT Reset 10 01 Ack Ax 10 Erase ID 10 01 Ack AO 14 List First ID 8X 14 ID Listing A0 15 List Next ID 8X 14 ID Listing A8 18 ID Status Request 81 18 ID Status 5 Protocols 303 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 5 5 304 Command Return A0 1c Longuest Contiguous Available Storage 84 1C Longest Contiguous Available Storage A0 21 Device ID Request 88 21 Device ID A8 20 Set Device ID 10 01 Ack EVS adds some custom commands to the protocol in order to take advantage of the server potential Please contact EVS to know more about these commands VDCP Protocol Capabilities The Video Disk Control Protocol VDCP is a protocol dedicated to the video server and design for the automation This protocol is able to e control several channels with one serial connection e preload and chain clips e create clips e get the server database Characteristics Bitrates 38 4 kilobits s Command Construction STX BC CMD1 CMD2 Data 1 oa DataN Check Sum 1 byte where e STX 02 BC number of byte in the command e CMD 1 Command type e CMD 2 Command number Data Command parameter max 255 Datas e CheckSum validity check 5 Protocols CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 5 Protocols Replies e Ack 0x04 or Nack 0x05 e Replies with data Supported Commands This table summarizes the supported commands VariD mode 80 15 80 16 A0
105. Intra HD e Avid DNxHD 120 185 or 185x only in 50 Hz Avid DNxHD 145 220 or 220x only in 59 94 Hz Apple ProRes 422 422 LT 422 HQ e DVCProHD e AVC Intra 100 See section Codec Availability on page 126 for detailed information on codec availability e IMXinSD e Avid DNxHD 120 in HD 50Hz e Avid DNxHD 145 in HD 59 94 Hz q Note q When the EVS server is configured to work in AVC Intra codec the XAVC codec is also available in playout 124 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Codec Codec LongGOP Description Algorithm used to compress and decompress the video signal With LongGOP codecs the compression techniques are performed relative to information contained within the current frame but also to information relative to other frames in the group of pictures GOP Values XDCAM HD 50 Proxy Description Algorithm used to compress and decompress the video signal in low resolution It is used for remote browsing purposes It is not possible to run an EVS server with the Proxy essence only Values Mjpeg Bitrate Description Number of megabits processed per second Mbps The bitrate depends on the codec Values See section Codec Related Information on page 128 for detailed information on bitrates per codec Horizontal Res HD Description Number of white to black and black to white transitions that can be seen from the left to the right of the picture pixels
106. J4 p J3 y J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 p J3 5 88 3 Multicam Configuration eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sa Example 1x3G SLSM 6PH 2REC 1 PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM configuration with 1x3G SLSM 6PH 2REC 1 PLAY in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below On the codec module of the V3X board used both primary and secondary channels are used for each 3G SLSM REC OD eee ODE C3 eee C OEC A ian een CODECS mamma ODEC 6 IN5 IN 4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 IN2 OUT 5 IN 1 OUT 6 REC REC REC1 REC 1 REC1 3 2 5 6 3G 3 4 3G 1 2 3G J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 6B 5 IN 5B 5 IN 4B 95 IN 3B 5 IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J J6 J6 J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUTSB CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD ih SD HD SD HD amp K Available U Motion 10 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available U Motion 10 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 6U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5S IN1 OUT6 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec
107. LSM 6 Truck Manager Plugin 315 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 316 SLSM Rec Description Values Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Activates the slow motion recording and allows defining the type of SLSM recorder that is connected to the EVS server In SD None Single SD SLSM 3x Alt Parity Single SD SLSM 3x Ident Parity Double SD SLSM 3x Alt Parity Double SD SLSM 3x Ident Parity In HD None Single HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 3x Alt Parity Double HD SLSM 3x Alt Parity Double HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Triple HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 6x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 10x Alt Parity Single 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Double 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Triple 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Triple HD SLSM 3x Alt Parity Quad HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Quad 3G HD SLSM 2x Alt Parity Single HD SLSM 4x Alt Parity Double HD SLSM 4x Alt Parity Single 3G HD SLSM 6x Alt Parity In 4K Single HD SLSM 2x 6 Truck Manager Plugin CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Port Settings Port 1 6 V5 The default value is only applicable to the settings in the Multicam application not to the settings in the Truck Manager plugin Description Values Default Specifies what type of device controller is connected to each RS422 port of the EVS server The following values can be available if the required license codes are active EVS Remote for LSM Remote Panel code between 103 and 109
108. M 2x 3x 4x 6x Configurations The SLSM 2x 3x 4x 6x configurations are available with all HD and SD codecs natively supported by the EVS server These configurations are valid when the following conditions are fulfilled The license code 110 Super Motion is valid e The base configuration is Multicam LSM Note q The SLSM 6x configurations are also supported with the license code 26 Only SLSM 6x 10x 3G SLSM 2x 6x Configurations The 3G SLSM 2x 6x configurations are valid with all HD codecs natively supported by the EVS server in the following conditions e The license code 110 Super Motion is valid e The base configuration is Multicam LSM The parameter 3G Dual is set to No e The resolution must be HD 720p or 1080i Q Note q The 3G SLSM configurations are managed via the SLSM REC setting and not via the 3G Dual setting As the EVS server is operated in HD this allows the connection of both a standard HD camera and a 3G SLSM camera at the same time U Motion 10x Configurations The U Motion 10x configurations are available when the following conditions are fulfilled e The license code 25 SLSM 10x for standard servers or the license code 26 Only SLSM 6x 10x for servers dedicated to U Motion is valid e The base configuration is Multicam LSM e The resolution must be HD 720p or 1080i The codec used must be one of the following o MJpeg up to 110 Mbps DNxHD up to 100 Mbps o gt Apple Pr
109. MTPC board on the server Values The IP addresses 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 are not allowed Subnet Mask Description Range of logical addresses within the address space assigned to the MTPC board connection Default Gateway Description IP address of the router on the network that the MTPC board can use as an access point to external networks 138 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 4 3 4 1 MEW Channels Tab Overview Channels Tab The Channels tab consists of maximum nine pages in the advanced mode in the server based application and two pages in the basic mode The Channels tab includes the settings related to video and audio channels type and configuration of recorders audio format and audio video synchronization parameters Setting List The table below presents the settings of the Channels tab They specify where the setting groups are available page and whether each setting is available e inthe basic or advanced display mode in the server based and web based interfaces In the web based interface the settings are all displayed on one page e inthe Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Setting Name Basic Advanced Beh rE aut ea z Inputs xX Outputs Base config 3D X X X X X X SLSM Rec X X X X TwinRec X X 3G Dual X X Port settings P1 P1 RS422 1 6 X 4 4 x Xx X NM x B x x x x x x x lt Channels and control settings
110. N4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC 3 E F 2 F E ae eee ee eee ee ee 1 a na 2 a ae Ley aa 2 eo ae oe es Example 1080p 3G 1SLSM 2x 1REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G configuration 1SLSM 2PH 1REC 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below With the full 1080p only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used SLSM 2PH OD OD O OUT 2 IN4 OUT 3 IN2 E JT J8 J7 JB IN 6B 5 IN 5B a IN 4B w IN 3B w IN 2B 5 IN 1B w CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J CHAR OUT OUT 1B CHAR ouri our 2B CHAR our our 3B CHAR our our 4B CHAR OUT OUT 5B CHAR out f our 6B J4 i J3 i J4 j J3 _ J4 _ J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 J3 f Note In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface both primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled However only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full 1080p configurations D 3 Multicam Configuration 107 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Available SLSM 3x Configurations in 3D The tables below show the available 3D configurations with SLSM 3 Phase cameras on a XT3 6U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link
111. NFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 V5 Lipsync value ms Description Values Default value Specifies the delay in ms between video and audio signals e A positive value means video is ahead of audio e Anegative value means audio ahead of video The following values are possible e Range for PAL from 41 458 ms to 14 708 ms 848 to 3544 samples 0 ms gt 2838 samples e Range for NTSC from 34 625 to 12 125 ms 688 to 2932 samples 0 ms 2350 samples 0 ms Q Note q This adjustment is done during the record process A new Lipsync value will apply for the next recorded pictures only Aux track output Description Values Default value 3 Multicam Configuration Specifies to which audio outputs the auxiliary track of the playlist will be played out The following values are possible e PRV The auxiliary track will use the audio outputs normally assigned to the PRV channel If no PRV channel is available the Aux Track will not be assigned to any audio output e PRV amp 7 8 15 16 The auxiliary track will use the audio outputs normally assigned to the PRV channel if there is one plus all the audio outputs from 7 8 15 16 that have not yet been assigned to another channel Use this option if you need an auxiliary track without PRV channel available e PGM The auxiliary track will use the audio outputs normally assigned to the PGM channel PRV 265 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 1
112. OP essence on the clips EVS server Clear only record trains Delete the record trains on the EVS server Cancel clear video disks Cancel the clear video disks command previously issued Configuration Area Introduction This section describes the Configuration area located above the settings in the Multicam plugin 7 test RCP SDTI Configuration name test RCP SDTI Field Description The following table describes the fields in the Configuration area from left to right and form top to bottom Item Use this item to Configuration Select the Multicam configuration you want to edit in the Selection field Truck Manager Advanced button Access the web based interface of the Multicam Configuration window and to access the advanced parameters not available in the Truck Manager Configuration Name Change the name of the selected configuration field 6 Truck Manager Plugin 311 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 6 5 Server Area Introduction This section describes the various settings available in the Server area Once you have specified the requested values for the various settings click the Apply button to apply the values remotely to Multicam Video Field Rate Description Field frequency used HZ Both field rate and resolution give the video standard Values 50 00 Hz PAL default 59 94 Hz NTSC 59 94 Hz J Resolution Description Vertical resolution used numbe
113. OWN channel In the Web Based Interface To modify the audio gain of an audio channel or mute it proceed as follows 1 Inthe Channels tab select the Inputs tab or Outputs tab of the Advanced Audio Settings depending on whether you want to work on audio input or output channels 2 Click the Show gain button The audio gain applied to each mono channel is displayed instead of the audio type and routing data 180 3 Multicam Configuration a V amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 Inthe requested cell click the value you want to modify and select the requested audio gain or mute value from the list Dolby Audio Management Concepts Dolby Digital or Dolby 5 1 or AC 3 is an audio coding system containing up to 6 discrete channels of sound with 5 channels for normal range speakers 20 Hz 20 000 Hz Right front Center Left Front Right Rear and Left Rear and one channel 20 Hz 120 Hz for the LFE or subwoofer e Dolby E is a professional coding system optimized for the distribution of surround and multichannel audio through two channel postproduction and broadcasting infrastructures or for recording surround audio on two audio tracks of conventional digital video tapes video servers communication links switchers and routers Note q Dolby E is not supported in Proxy essence If audio channels are configured in Dolby E in a multi essence configuration with Proxy the Proxy output will have no a
114. P1 P1 OUT1 6 IN1 6 Name Main ctrl Sec ctrl 3 Multicam Configuration 139 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 140 Setting Name Mode OSD Audio settings Audio connectors Number of tracks Audio full scale Ancillary mode Sample rate conv Audio monitoring group Mon 1 4 Advanced audio settings Inputs Advanced audio settings Embedded outputs Advanced audio settings Digital AES EBU outputs Advanced audio settings Analog outputs Recorder settings Loop recording Rec auto start Clip Capacity Autosense 4 3 conversion Rec capacity SD HD conversion Mix on one channel setting OUT1 6 Timecode settings LTC User Primary TC SMPTE 334M packets management settings Basic P2 Advan P8 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Technical Setup X ced lt x lt x lt x lt x lt xN x lt x lt T2 X T2 X 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 4 2 Setting Name Basic Advanced eer i Decoding x x Encoding E x x Custom 1 2 eee xX SD OUT Encoding z x Timecode insertion settings IN Loop settings SD OUT settings HD OUT settings Channels Base Settings User Interface The base settings allow defining the main characteristics of a configuration as regards play and record channels Warning Some base settings Inputs Outputs Base config require
115. P2 X Codec target P2 X Protocol receive page P2 X Playlist receive page P2 X Timeline receive page P2 X Playlist Settings Setting Name Basic E i Playlist settings P2 3 x Video effect duration X X Audio locked to video X X Audio effect duration X X Wipe type X X Default playlist speed X X Insert in playlist X X Confirm Ins Del clips X X Advanced audio editing X X Extend split transition X X 3 Multicam Configuration 237 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Setting Name Basic scart Swap audio tracks X X Playlist loop X X Playlist auto fill X X Fade to from color X X Load playlist X X Miscellaneous Settings Setting Name Basic ee Timeline settings P3 4 1 Mono per group X X Protection settings P3 5 1 Protect pages X X Clip edit by network X X Confirm delete clips playlists X X Keywords settings P3 6 1 Keyword files X X Keyword mode X X Push settings P3 7 1 Push target X X Codec target X X Push target 1 2 X X Push mode X X Push receive page X X Audio settings P3 8 1 Audio slow motion X Lipsync value Aux track output 238 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Controller Settings Setting Name Basic ie Controller settings P4 9 X Effect duration for take X X Fast jog X X PGM Speed Var max X X Lever engage mode X X Second lever range X X Recall clip toggle X X Record key X X Pointing device X X VGA amp Remote sync X X Call channel VGA X X PGM PRV mode
116. PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC 1TL 1TR 1BL 1BR 1TR 1TL J8 J7 J8 T J8 i J8 J7 J8 J8 IN 6B 35 IN 5B 5 IN 4B J5 IN 3B 35 IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC REC 1BR 1BL J6 J6 J6 J6 J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SDIHD SDIHD SD HD SD HD SDIHD J4 b J3 b J4 b J3 _ J4 3 J3 i J4 F J3 b J4 b J3 b J4 p J3 7 114 3 Multicam Configuration V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Example 4K 2REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 4K configuration 2REC 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below CODEC ES O d OD OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN 4 OUT 3 IN2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC 1TL 1TR 1BR 1BL 1TR J7 J8 E J8 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC REC pas REC 2BR 2BL 2TL J J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR ouT our 4B CHAR out our 5B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SD HD SDIHD SDIHD SD HD SDIHD PLAY PLAY 1BL 1BR J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 Example 4K 1REC 2PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 4K configuration 1REC 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J IN 1B 35 J7 J8 J7 J8 IN 6B 5 IN 5B 95 IN 4B 5 n IN 3B wy IN 2B w CODEC 2 m CODEC Ma 4 OD OD OUT 1 IN5 IN 4 OUT 3 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 PLAY PLAY PLAY
117. REC REC 1TL 1BL 1BR 1TR 1TL J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J7 IN 6B 5 IN 5B 5 IN IN 3B 5 IN 2B 0 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC 1BL REC 1BR J6 J6 J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR our our 5B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SDHD SD HD SDIHD SD HD SD HD PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY 2TL 2TR 2BL 2BR J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 3 Multicam Configuration 115 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 2 11 116 4K SLSM Configurations Introduction Assignment Principles A 4K image consists of four 1080p frames transported via four 3G SDI links Each 1080p frame of a 4K image is called an image quadrant Each image quadrant is assigned to its corresponding 3G SDI link in the following sequence 1 TL 2 TR Top Left Top Right 3 BL 4 BR Bottom Left Bottom Right SLSM Principles This section details the available multi phase SLSM configurations on XT3 servers In SLSM configurations a supermotion recorder of a two phase camera accounts for one logical channel but corresponds to two physical channels In 4K SLSM configurations a supermotion recorder of a two phase camera corresponds to one logical channel and is cabled on the primary link of a codec module It however uses both primary and secondary links of that codec module on the V3X board Overview on Configurations The tables in the follo
118. Relay 2970 Mbps e Off Net Name Description Machine name on the SDTI network It is not mandatory because a network number is assigned to the EVS server It is however recommended as it helps to easily identify the servers connected to the XNet network The Net Name will be displayed even if the SDTI code is not valid Values The Net Name is user defined and cannot exceed 8 characters 318 6 Truck Manager Plugin ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Type Description Defines the privileges of the EVS server on the SDTI network Values The following values are possible e Client It cannot access the content on other EVS servers e Master It can access all content on other EVS servers e Server It manages the SDTI network and it can access all content on other EVS servers Only one EVS server on the network should be set to Server type If no Server type is defined on the network XNet will not be established If more than one EVS server is defined as Server type only the first one to connect will be the actual Server Whatever the server type defined the content of an EVS server can be accessed without restrictions by the other EVS servers with type Master or Server on the SDTI network Net Number Description The Net Number parameter defines the machine number on the network This number is user defined and must be unique for each system on the network An error message appears if the number is alread
119. Res 422 HQ 220 220 1920 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 V5 Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080p 50 Hz AVID Codec DNxHD 240 Bitrate 1 242 Mbps Default 242 bitrate Horizontal 1920 Resolution avip AVD DNxHD DNxHD ae 365x 10b 243 367 243 367 367 367 1920 1920 Apple Apple Apple AVC AVC ProRes ProRes ProRes Intra Intra 422 170 170 LT 422 SQ 422HQ 50 100 245 367 108 222 245 367 108 222 1920 1920 1920 1440 1920 Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080p 59 94 Hz Bitrate 1 291 AVID Codec DNxHD 290 Mbps Default 291 bitrate Horizontal 1920 Resolution ayip AVD DNxHD DNxHD 440 E 10b 292 440 292 440 440 440 1920 1920 Apple Apple Apple AVC AVC ProRes ProRes ProRes Intra Intra 422 204 204 LT 422 SQ 422HQ 50 100 293 440 108 222 293 440 108 222 1920 1920 1920 1440 1920 Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in 4K 50 and 59 94 Hz The following table presents the bitrate per quadrant The total bitrate for one channel therefore corresponds to four times the values specified in this table Field rate Codec 50 Hz AVID DNxHD 59 94 Hz AVID DNxHD Bitrate Mbps Default bitrate Horizontal Resolution 3 Multicam Configuration 100 242 x4 242 x4 3840 100 260 x4 260 x4 3840 133 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 134 Issue 12 05 D January 2015
120. S Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 2 2 Launching a Configuration Introduction When the EVS server has initialized the Multicam Setup window stays open by default until the operator selects the requested configuration line and launches it Multicam can encode the video signal simultaneously in several essences and grant a seamless access to the video material in all active essences The material ingested on an EVS server must therefore as much as possible be and remain available on this server in all active essences For this reason some restrictions or checks are applied when you launch a configuration Compatible Multi Essence Configurations On the same SDTI network it is not allowed to have EVS servers with mixed multi essence configurations or e acombination of EVS servers supporting and not supporting multi essence configurations In such situations you will get the following message when you try to launch a configuration on the EVS server Incompatible multi codec configuration on the network You have the option to come back to the Multicam Setup window to select a configuration compatible with the other EVS servers e work in standalone mode This mode will prevent you from browsing the content of other EVS servers and from transferring content to other EVS servers Change of Multi Essence Configuration To make sure the video material is available in the required essences on
121. See section Clearing Video Disks on page 42 See section General Information Window on page 285 Support of Cue Points on Clips e See section EVS Controller Settings on page 266 New XT3 4U chassis See section Gigabit Connection on page 194 See section Audio Connectors on page 165 The following changes unrelated to new features and therefore not highlighted with the New icon have been brought to the configuration manual Section on enhanced playout mode in standard and SLSM configurations See section Enhanced Playout Mode on page 62 Section on protocols See section Protocols on page 299 Updates in SLSM 3G configurations e See section SLSM Configurations on page 69 What s New Ee V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sa 1 Introduction 1 1 Introduction to the Configuration of EVS Servers Configuration Module The Multicam Setup application is used for configuration and maintenance operations on EVS video servers It is also used to select which application to run since EVS disk recorders have the ability to run various dedicated applications Video Server Slow Motion The configuration module available from Multicam 11 00 has been developed along the lines presented in this section Consolidation into a Single User Interface The server can be fully configured from a single user interface The user interface includes e _asetup section presented on one page with two mai
122. Server 12 05 Si Recorder Description Selects the record channel to which the A V material from the hypermotion camera will be sent Values CAM A to CAM D Default Values The default value is the last CAM defined in the channel configuration for ex CAM C in a 3 IN 3 OUT configuration Remote mode Description Specifies the camera elements controlled by the server Values e Hypermotion only The server controls only the hypermotion camera An additional remote is made available in the main menu of the remote panel since the hypermotion camera is considered as an additional external camera e Hypermotion LSM The server controls the hypermotion camera and one PGM in exclusive mode Default value Hypermotion only Port Description Specifies on which port RS422 or Lan PC the commands must be sent to the hypermotion camera and possibly to the PGM if you have selected Hypermotion LSM in the Remote Mode parameter Values The following values are possible e RS422 2 toRS422 6 e LanPC The port value is specific to the camera See the camera specific section in the operational manual Default value RS422 6 3 Multicam Configuration 277 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 3 9 15 278 Protocol Description Values Default values IP Address Availability Description Values Default value Dial Speed Description Values Default value Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Specifies the protocol t
123. Settings Introduction The Advanced Audio settings are defined in the Channels tab of the Multicam Configuration window In the server based application they are displayed on page 3 to 6 which are only available in the advanced mode They allow audio channel routing muting and adjusting the audio gain The Advanced Audio settings for the inputs allow users to specify how the audio sources are routed to the audio mono channels of each record channel The Advanced Audio settings for the outputs allow users to specify how the audio mono channels are routed to each play channel for embedded audio or to the various physical audio connectors digital or analog connectors In the server based application the advanced audio settings are available on different pages Page Type of audio settings Page 3 audio inputs Page 4 audio embedded outputs Page 5 audio digital outputs AES EBU Page 6 audio analog outputs In the web based interface the audio inputs and outputs are displayed in separate tables features as tabs in the Channels tab The various audio outputs are all displayed in the same table q Note q The settings for audio digital and analog outputs are only available when the corresponding connectors are defined in the Audio Connectors field Audio settings section that reflects the audio hardware configuration 3 Multicam Configuration 167 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 168 General Princi
124. Settings on page 141 The number of play and record channels available may differ depending on the chassis and on the configurations running on the XT3 server e Multicam LSM mode when the EVS server is controlled by the Remote Panel Spotbox mode when the EVS server is controlled by industry standard protocols such as Sony BVW75 VDCP Odetics DD35 EVS AVSP IPDP EditRec or Linx API 1Feature that allows using the secondary link of the codec module of a player channel on the V3X board J3 as the preview channel to provide the PGM PRV mode with a single codec module 3 Multicam Configuration 59 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 The following table shows the minimum and maximum number of channels that can be operated in both modes 6U 4U LSM Spotbox LSM Spotbox Max channels 8 8 7 7 Min REC 1 0 1 0 Max REC 6 6 6 6 Min PLAY 1 0 1 0 Max PLAY 5 6 3 4 Q Note q Based on the above mentioned limitations some configurations described in the following sections are only available in Server or Spotbox mode Channel Assignment The following general principles apply to all configurations and are valid for all EVS servers equipped with V3X boards e The record channels IN connectors are always assigned from the right to the left OE ag pp ODEO Bes CODEC A eS ee IN6 OUT 1 N5 OUT 2 IN4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 IN2 OUT 5 IN1 IN 6B w IN 5B u IN 4B w IN 3B u IN 2B u IN 1B w
125. T Bitrates for SLSM configurations The following table presents the available codecs and the corresponding maximum bitrates Mbps per SLSM phase for SLSM 4x 6x and 10x configurations The total REC bitrate is the configured bitrate multiplied by the number of phases HD HD HD AVC DVCPro Codec Mjpeg Mjpeg Mpeg 2 Intra HD EVS Standard Intra 100 SLSM 4x 50 or 59 94 Hz 185 185 185 111 100 SLSM 6x 50 or 59 94 Hz 120 120 120 SLSM 10x 50 or 59 94 Hz 100 100 AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes 120 185 185x 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ SLSM 4x 50 Hz 120 185 185 85 120 185 SLSM 6x 50 Hz 120 85 120 SLSM 10x 50 Hz 100 85 AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes 145 220 220x 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ SLSM 4x 59 94 Hz 145 220 220 102 145 220 SLSM 6x 59 94 Hz 120 102 145 SLSM 10x 59 94 Hz 100 102 Properties of the Proxy Codec The Mjpeg Proxy codec has the following properties Property Bitrate Mbps Default bitrate Resolution Value 3or5 3 SD NTSC 352 x 240 pixels CIF 352 x 288 pixels CIF is used in all modes other than SD NTSC 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 3 3 Phase Definition Settings User Interface The Phase Definition settings are available on the Server tab in the server based application 2 9 page and web based interfac
126. The setting value depends on the selected video standard and on the codec Values See section Codec Related Information on page 128 for detailed information on horizontal resolution for each video standard and codec 3 Multicam Configuration 125 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Recorded Lines SD Description Number of lines recorded from the top to the bottom of the picture The setting value depends on the selected video standard and on the codec Values See section Codec Related Information on page 128 for detailed information on recorded lines for each video standard and codec Codec Availability Introduction The codec availability mainly depends on whether the license code required for a given codec is active or not The codec availability of the LongGOP or Proxy essence depends on additional hardware and software requirements detailed below Requirement Overview Codec Intra The Intra codecs are available when the respective license code is active On an XT3 server several license codes are available as standard codecs on the base server hardware Codec LongGOP The codec LongGOP settings and the XDCAM codec are available in the following conditions e The server is fitted with an H3X board e The server is fitted with V3X base boards equipped with XDCAM modules e The license code for LongGOP 14 is granted on the server e The video standard is 720p or 1080i e The SLSM re
127. This license keys can be temporary be valid only until a defined deadline for demonstration purposes or be permanent with no time limit The license keys are managed from the Options codes management window This window is available in both the server based application and the web based interface Q Note q When a temporary license code will expire within the next two weeks or is expired the system warns the operator when the Multicam Setup window opens Accessing the Options Codes Management Window To open the Options codes management window in the server based application press O from the Multicam Setup window To open the Option codes management window in the web based interface click Options code management in the Tools menu from the Multicam Setup window 2 Multicam Setup eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 4 2 Options Codes Management Window In the Server Based Application The window features three areas which contain the information mentioned below System ID Serial number Chassis type PSU type Key date and time are Full options Validation code lt ALT F gt Update from local file lt ALT U gt Update from USB key lt Esc gt Quit Area Description Upper area List of key settings related to the EVS server e System ID ID code of the hardware key necessary for license code calculation Serial number Serial number of the mainframe also written on the back plate of the mainfra
128. This parameter is only displayed in Multicam LSM Replay Only LSM and XSense configurations Introduction When creating clips the clip corresponding to the camera on which IN OUT points have been marked are always saved It is possible to save automatically the same action on the other cameras Only cameras letters applicable to the logical channels are displayed Description Specifies that clips have to be created on the given camera A B C D E or F even if no IN or OUT point has been marked on that camera Values Yes No Default value Yes Make clip rem trains Availability This setting is only available if the license code 117 is valid Description Allows users to clip all cameras of a remote EVS server if at least one record train of that server is controlled Values Ctrled Cams All cams Default value Ctrled Cams Guardbands Description Specifies the amount of A V material that remains available before and after a clip called guardbands when the clip is created Values From 00s00fr to 6OsOOfr Default value 05s00fr 3 Multicam Configuration 245 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Default clip duration Description Values Default value Autoname clips Description Values Default value 246 Specifies the duration of clips created with only one reference point IN or OUT point Disable or from 00sO1fr to 4h When set to Disable both IN and OUT points are require
129. VS server level Default value Local Length Description Specifies whether the VarlD has a fixed length of 8 bytes ora variable length of 32 bytes Values e 8 fixed length e 32 variable length 3 Multicam Configuration 227 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 228 Default value Format Description Values Default value VDCP Visibility Description Values Default value Issue 12 05 D January 2015 32 Specifies whether the VarlD has an ASCII or binary format e ASCII e Binary ASCII Specifies the list of servers which will be visible on the various communication ports that the VDCP protocol will use to communicate with This parameter is only relevant for the VDCP protocol For alist of servers use the corresponding servers XNet numbers separated with a semi colon Please note that the list order is taken into account in the visibility This means that the system first searches for the requested clips on the first server of the list then on the second and so on e empty the local server is used converted to the local XNet number e 1to 29 the servers available on XNet e forall XNet servers 1 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 8 3 8 1 GPI Tab Overview GPI Tab The GPI tab consists of one page in basic mode there are no advanced parameters in the server based application The GPI tab includes the settings of the GPI inputs
130. _ key corresponding to the requested setting Modifying the setting value Turn the jog wheel Validating the modification to a setting value ENTER Restoring the default value for the selected setting CLEAR F_key corresponding to the requested setting Restoring the default values on the entire Setup menu CLEAR F0 Validating the changes in the Setup menu MENU to answer to the message when you try to leave the menu Cancelling the changes in the Setup menu CLEAR to answer to the message when you try to leave the menu Staying in the Setup menu ENTER to answer to the message when you try to leave the menu 3 1 6 Required Application Reboot Introduction Modifications to some parameters will only be applied after rebooting the application When you change one of the following parameters a message will inform you that you need to reboot Multicam Such parameters are summarized below but the parameter description also specifies when a reboot is required Tab Name Setting Name Server tab Some video and reference settings e Field rate e Resolution e LTC timecode Server tab All codec settings Warning A When you change the codec essences active on the EVS server you may be required to clear the video disks See section Clearing Video Disks on page 42 3 Multicam Configuration 57 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 58 Tab Name Server tab Channels tab Channels tab Channels tab Network tab Network tab
131. ace Two cables seen as one logical channel record or play channel by the EVS server are connected to both connectors of a codec module for example IN1 and IN1B in REC e 3Ginterface A single cable corresponding to a logical channel is connected to the primary connector of a codec module On the V3X board a 3D connection is connected as follows Both primary and secondary channels of the codec module COD A or COD B on the V3X board are used whatever the connection interface to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G 3 Multicam Configuration 91 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 2 6 92 General Information on 1080p Configurations Introduction Depending on the server type and on the type of board installed the 1080p is implemented in different ways on the EVS server as regards file interoperability and transport mode This is explained in this section Based on these two factors file interoperability and transport mode the values available for the 3G Dual parameter on the Channels tab will differ See section Base Settings on page 141 for more information on this parameter Requirements The full 1080p with file native interoperability is available when the following hardware requirements are met e The EVS server is fitted with H3X and V3X boards The 1080p is available when the following software requirements are met e The license code 21 or 22 is activated on the EVS se
132. ain and audio mute information is hidden by default The CTRL G command allows you to toggle the display in the tables to show the audio gain and mute information The audio gain can be adjusted by steps of 0 75dB 3dB or 6B in the range from 77 250B to 23 25cB of the current audio level The following screenshot shows the display of mute and audio gain settings Advanced audio settings Inputs gt INi IN2 CAM A CAM B 3 Multicam Configuration 179 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 In the Server Based Application The following table shows the various commands available to adjust the audio gain and mute an audio channel in the server based application One of the following command can be applied on an individual channel when it is selected and when the audio gain display is on Command description Command key Hiding and Showing the audio gain display CTRL G Muting the selected audio channel CTRL M Un muting the selected audio channel CTRL U Increasing by 0 75dB the audio level of the selected audio SPACEBAR channel Lowering by 0 75dB the audio level of the selected audio SHIFT SPACEBAR channel Increasing by 3dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL ARROW RIGHT channel Lowering by 3dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL ARROW LEFT channel Increasing by 6dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL ARROW UP channel Lowering by 6dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL ARROW D
133. am Configuration 99 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 1080p 3G 3REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 1080p 3G configuration 3REC 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below With the full 1080p only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used re S ar rrt DEC rr op OE Sarg CODES A pp OPEC Se ING OUT 1 IN IN4 OUT 3 IN3 IN 2 OUT 5 IN 1 ie REC REC jea 3 2 J8 8 J7 IN 6B u IN 5B w IN 4B u IN 3B 5 IN 2B 5 IN 1B u J8 J7 J CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J6 CHAR OUT OUT 1B CHAR OUT f our 28 CHAR our f our 3B CHAR our f our 4B CHAR our f our se CHAR our f our es A Note In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface both primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled However only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full 1080p configurations O 3 2 8 3D 1080p SLSM Configurations Assignment Principles The combination of 3D standards and SLSM configurations associates the following individual rules for connector assignments on the rear panel For 3D in Dual Link with V3X boards the first cable arrives into the primary connector of acodec module and the second cable arrives into the secondary connector of the same codec module e For 3D in 3G singl
134. ameter modified in the Configuration page of the server based application the following message will be displayed on the VGA or on the LCD display of the Remote Panel The configuration will be updated if the user agrees The configuration has been modified by another user Do you want to load it and lose your modification Warning A When this message is displayed on the Remote Panel and the user answers No to the message Clear button the modifications performed on the Remote Panel will be preserved The changes applied on the VGA will however be loaded after the user leaves the operational setup menu except if the specific fields modified on the VGA have been modified and validated on the Remote Panel after the message display Overview of the Multicam Configuration Window Introduction In the server based and web based interfaces all server settings related to each configuration file are grouped in a single window the Multicam Configuration window When the server is not running a given configuration the Multicam Configuration window allows you to define any of the configurations available in the Multicam Setup window When the server is running a given configuration the Multicam Configuration window allows you to modify the settings of the running configuration The Multicam Configuration window is organized in a similar way in both user interfaces e It consists of seven tabs e Each tab contains one or more pages in th
135. an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows for changes to be taken into account These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 1 on the server and web based interfaces e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 X The following screenshot displays the Base settings defined on the Channels tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration 141 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 142 Inputs Description Values Outputs Description Values Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Number of logical record channels in the given configuration The partition of the disk storage between these channels and the advanced audio settings are automatically adapted to the number of record channels The number of supported channels depends on the chassis and the mode e OnXT3 0 6 Spotbox 1 6 LSM See section General Information on Supported Configurations on page 59 for more information on number of record channels and on supported configurations Number of logical play channels in the given configuration e OnXT36U 0 6 Spotbox 1 5 LSM e OnXT34U 0 4 Spotbox 1 3 LSM See section General Information on Supported Configurations on page 59 for more information on number of record channels and on supported configurations 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Ser
136. and outputs signals Setting List The table below presents the settings of the GPI tab They specify where the setting groups are available page and whether each setting is available e inthe server based and web based interfaces e inthe Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Setting Name Basic amp Advanced peat GPI Settings P1 T6 1 to T6 6 TTL GPls set as GPls X T6 1 GPls IN Channel Device X T6 2 to T6 3 Port X T6 2 to T6 3 Function X T6 2 to T6 3 Delay X T6 4 GPIs OUT Function X T6 5 Type X T6 5 Advance X T6 6 Pulse duration X T6 6 Tally Settings P1 T6 7 Tally X X Add Clip to PL X X Clips guardbands X X 3 Multicam Configuration 229 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 8 2 230 GPI Settings User Interface The GPI Settings allow specifying the settings related to the GPI inputs and outputs features These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window GPI tab e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T6 X The following screenshot displays the GPI settings on the GPI tab in the web based interface Note If the TTL GPIs set as GPlIs parameter is set to In then the display looks like the illustration above with 8 GPIs IN and 4 GPIs OUT lines If it is set to Out then the display is reorganized to expose 4 GPIs IN and 8 GPIs OUT lines 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si GPI
137. ange will be adapted so that e the only playback value for any position of the lever other than 0 is the one specified by this parameter in the setup PGM Spd mode ON OR e the speed range defined by the lever is limited to the value specified by this parameter VarMax mode ON Description Specifies the playback speed assigned to the lever when the PGM Speed or Var Max commands are used Values Range of values from 1 to 400 Default value 50 3 Multicam Configuration 267 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 268 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Lever engage mode Description Values Default value Specifies how the playback speed varies depending on the position of the lever This parameter is not relevant in XSense configurations The following values are possible e Direct mode The lever will engage directly when moved resulting ina speed jump to the desired speed determined by the lever arm position e Current speed mode The lever will only engage when it reaches the current playback speed whereas a move of the lever arm in the opposite direction of the current speed will result in a direct speed change 100 100 _ Current Speed 20 0 0 Direct Second lever range Context Description Values Default value The lever can be used in normal mode to play back clips at slow motion speed from 0 to 100 A secondary range is available to playback material at other speed ranges To gain ac
138. annel for which the audio will be monitored via the SDI outputs NEWI This is selectable individually for each multiviewer Values The list of values includes the channels selected above for multiviewer display Default value None Audio monitoring left right tracks Description Specifies the pair of stereo audio tracks of the selected channel to monitor HEW This is selectable individually for each multiviewer Values 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Default value 1 2 By default the first stereo pair of the source is selected Multiviewer Format DB15 output Description Specifies the color model to be applied to the multi pin multiviewer output on the rear panel of the EVS server NEW The multi pin multiviewer output corresponds to the HD SDI output 1 Values e RGB HD YUV HD Default value RGB HD 206 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si HD output format NEW Description Specifies the format for the HD output of the multiviewer Both multiviewers use the same HD output format Values 720p e 1080i Default value e 720p if the EVS Server is configured in 720p 3 6 3 e 1080i in other cases OSD Settings User Interface The OSD settings allow specifying the settings related to the OSD and information to be displayed on the monitoring screen These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Monitoring tab
139. anual The operator can define which audio tracks he wants to swap when inserting a swap point This is the only value available in 8 and 16 audio configurations Auto 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Playlist loop Description Values Default value Playlist auto fill Description Values Default value V5 Specifies whether the playlists in play mode will be looped and played back continuously Yes No No Specifies which camera angles will be added to the playlists when using the Fill Playlist F9 function from the main menu of the Remote Panel The following values are possible All Cam The clips for all camera angles will be added to the playlist e Prim Sec The clips corresponding to the primary and secondary camera angles will be added to the playlist e Primary The clips corresponding to the primary camera angles will be added to the playlist e Secondary The clips corresponding to the secondary camera angles will be added to the playlist e Cam A Cam B Cam C Cam D Cam E or Cam F The clips corresponding to the defined camera angle will be added to the playlist All Cam Fade to from color Description Values Default value 3 Multicam Configuration Specifies the color that is used in the transition effects fade to color fade from color and fade to from color V fade Black White Black 255 EVS Broadcast Equip
140. are disk has been disconnected The system will operate normally on the remaining disks At the next opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk It can be identified in the Shift F5 screen or in the EVS RAID configuration menu Enter Continue e if the faulty disk is contained in a RAID Warning a disk has been disconnected The system will operate normally on the remaining disks At the next opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk It can be identified in the Shift F5 screen or in the EVS RAID configuration menu Enter Continue Exit When exiting Multicam a warning will appear to remind the operator that one disk was disconnected and invite him to perform a hardware check to repair the video raid This is displayed even if a spare disk is available e if the faulty disk is a spare disk Warning a spare disk has been disconnected At the next opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk It can be identified in the Shift F5 screen or in the EVS RAID configuration menu Enter Continue e if the faulty disk is contained in a RAID Warning a disk has been disconnected At the next opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk It can be identified in the Shift F5 screen or in the EVS RAID configuration menu Enter Continue 2 Multicam Setup 39 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Restarting If Multicam is restarted
141. are or GbE hardware and on the value of the Speed setting in the Network tab The following screenshot displays the Push settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration 261 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Push Target Description Values Default Value Codec target Description Values Default value 262 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Specifies which EVS servers will be listed as possible targets for push actions when the user selects e the default Target 1 and Target 2 in the settings or e atarget for a specific push action if no default target has been configured The following values are possible e SDTI Only SDTI targets will be listed The servers are listed by their network system name and number Gigabit Only EVS servers reachable via the GbE network and not present on the same SDTI network will be listed The servers are listed by their GbE server name and IP Address e SDTI Gigabit First the servers on the same SDTI network connected through SDTI are listed then the servers not on the same SDTI network but reachable via the GbE network are listed The Gigabit and SDTI Gigabit values are not available if the EVS server does not have a GbE board SDTI Specifies which essence s of the clip will be used in case of a push action Two values are possible for this parameter Intra Only the Intra essence of the clip is pushed Intra LongGOP
142. arious communication protocols The following screenshot displays the Timecode settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab in the web based interface Serial Sony LTC Description Values Serial Sony VITC Description Values Default value Specifies the type of timecode used in communications between the Sony controller and the Edit Rec engine when the controller works with the LTC This field is not editable The value is always Edit TC meaning the timecode of the playlist based on the Start TC Specifies the type of timecode used in communications between the Sony controller and the Edit Rec engine when the controller works with the VITC e Edit TC the playlist timecode based on the defined Start TO User TC the clip timecode from the USER TC table Edit TC 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Insert TC in SDI 1 or 2 fields Description Activates or deactivates the timecode insertion in the VITC in SD or in the HANC in HD when the playlist is played out on the Edit Rec play channel Values e No no timecode is inserted e Yes the following timecode is inserted Edit TC the playlist timecode based on the defined Start TC Default the timecode selected in the D VITC field in SD or in the HANC VITC LTC fields in HD defined in Timecode Insertion Settings Default value Yes Edit TC User TC of created clips Description Specifies the TC type i
143. assigned to one Remote Panel Only a Remote Panel no other controller can be assigned to a REC channel as a main controller No secondary controller can be assigned to a REC channel In a Spotbox or Server base configuration o o A Remote Panel is not allowed Controllers other than the EVS Remote can be assigned to play or record channels taking into account the protocol specific rules on controller use and combinations 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Protocol Specific Assignment Rules Standalone Protocol The table shows whether or not the given protocol used as a standalone as main controller without secondary controller can be assigned to the specified number of play channels record channels or play and record channel combinations The green cells refer to allowed assignments the red ones to banned assignments Numbers in the cells refer to the notes mentioned below the table Odetics VDCP Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 F amp K F amp K LinX 1 PGM orou eee gt ar O ine ee ons o BEEE 1 PGM 1 REC Several PGM 1 REC Several PGM Several REC 1 Every recorder 2 Protocol Used in Exclusive Mode Only consecutive PGMs The table shows whether or not the given protocol used in exclusive mode as a main controller or secondary controller can be assigned to the specified number of play channels record channels or
144. bility The TwinRec feature and its associated parameter are available and displayed in the following conditions e onaXT36U server fitted with 3 codec boards e with valid license codes 33 TwinRec and 23 3D Dual e with a Spotbox base configuration Base Settings section The TwinRec parameter can only be activated when all the following conditions are met The Resolution parameter is set to 720p or 1080i Server tab Video and Reference section The Intra only or Intra Proxy mode is active Server tab Codec section The EVS server runs a6 IN 0 OUT or 4 IN 0 OUT channel configuration Base Settings section The 3D parameter is set to No Base Settings section e The 3G Dual parameter is set to Dual Base Settings section Inthe SLSM settings the Number of cameras parameter is set to 0 Base Settings section A message will warn the user if one of the above mentioned conditions is not fulfilled 3 Multicam Configuration 147 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 148 Limitations The following limitations are applicable to the TwinRec feature as the configuration of the main channels is applied to the corresponding secondary channels e The TwinRec function is only available in HD only in intra frame codecs e The audio is only recorded on the main channels not on the secondary channels When the feeds are exported to an external storage Xsquare will however duplicate the a
145. byE Set all audio channels to None CTRL N all None applicable to all E D or A outputs at atime Reset all the audio configuration also F5 on other pages to default values Route all audio input channels of CTRL 0 Rec 1 on all REC 1 to the other record channels only audio inputs Validating the changes ALT A Apply Individual Editing Actions in the Server Based Application In the server based application use the general editing commands for modifying individual field cell values audio type or audio routing Command description Command key Selecting a field value TAB Scrolling down in the list of the possible values for the SPACEBAR selected field Scrolling up in the list of the possible values for the selected SHIFT SPACEBAR field 178 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Individual Editing Actions in the Web Based Interface In the web based application click on the values you want to edit in the requested cell s The available values are displayed in drop down fields which allow you to select the requested value individually Modifying the Audio Gain and Mute Settings Introduction From the Advanced Audio Settings pages 3 6 of the Channels tab you can not only modify the default routing of audio channels but also do the following e Adjusting the audio gain for each audio mono channel individually e Muting individual audio channels The audio g
146. c Prim Sec REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch a a a a nz 5 2 6 2 4 3 5 3 3 4 4 4 2 5 Example 4REC 4PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 4REC 4PLAY XREC configuration need to be cabled as shown below IN6 OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 IN 2 ouT5 IN 1 K a PLAY PLAY REC REC 2 1 J8 J7 J8 J7 w NE u IN 4B u IN 3B w IN 2B 95 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC REC 4 3 J6 J6 CHAR our our 1B CHAR ouT our 2B CHAR ouT our 3B ur our 4B CHAR OUT OUTS5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 p J3 i J4 lt J3 J4 J3 i J4 i J3 i 66 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 2 3 General Information on Supermotion Configurations Concepts The Supermotion cameras are two to six phase cameras that record the incoming feeds at aframe rate 2 3 4 or 6 times higher than a standard camera The Ultramotion cameras are 10 phase cameras that record the incoming feeds at a frame rate 10 times higher than a standard camera The Hypermotion cameras should clearly be distinguished from the supermotion and ultramotion cameras in two respects The A V material from the supermotion and ultramotion cameras is continuously fed into the EVS server whereas the A V material from the
147. c cece ccc e cece ee eeees 69 3 2 5 General Information on 3D Configurations 220000 eee eee 91 3 2 6 General Information on 1080p Configurations 220 222202022 92 3 2 7 3D 1080p Standard Configurations 000 00 e cece e cece eee 93 3 2 8 3D 1080p SLSM Configurations 0 0 000000202 e eee e cece cece e eee 100 3 2 9 General Information on 4K Configurations 20220202 0222220222 111 3 2 10 4K Configurations 00 00022 c coco ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc c cece annann 113 3 2 11 4K SLSM Configurations 00 0 00022 e cece cece cece cece cece ce cece eee eees 116 SSP OeCIVER TaD govt nt Aten ae gS ee yA net eee aah tol ott SP Nr a Eh dl hate J 118 Bile SOVENVIOW fanaa etn G to re lt ADE aE NS ee 118 3 3 2 Video Codecs and Reference 22 22222 cc cece cece eee cceeeeees 119 3 3 3 Phase Definition Settings 0 2 c cece cece cece ecceceeeeeee 135 3 3 4 Interpolation Settings 002222 c cece cece eee eeees 136 3 3 9 PC LAN Settings 30525 eves cabo sos Mies tar O08 hn a key pos 137 3 4 Channels Tab 22 00 2222 c cece cece eee c cece ccc na aooaa naroa onnan 139 3A OVEMVIOW lt 2 2 0ctvads dos deci dae aal deat de pula a aa paul un danenrt tat tana 139 O42 CHANMEIS a etic states ahaa eee token gd eed O te cot Len Meet le 141 34 3 sAUGION set 10 pce ne tian tate Act cso teeters Ai cas Sa kein eit die os 1 164 3 4 4
148. cense codes are activated InSD e 525i e 625i In HD e 720p e 1080i e 1080p only available with code 21 or 22 In 3G e UHDTV 4K Specifies the aspect ratio of the content provided on the input video signal The following values are available In SD 16 9 43 4 3 Letterbox Black stripes are placed above and below the active video to compensate for the full width e 16 9 Pillarbox Black stripes are placed left and right of the active video to fill in the missing pixels InHD 16 9 e 16 9 Pillarbox 16 9 Longitudinal timecode timecode information stored ona separate track from the video delivered to the EVS server and timecode status The timecode is given as hh mm ss fr only on the server based application The timecode status can be OK or Valid BAD LOST or DRIFT defined by the EVS server 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Sync PC Time to TC Description Specifies whether the PC time is synchronized with the timecode and how often the synchronization takes place Values Synchronization Yes No Frequency by default every 00h15 not editable Genlock Description Specifies the type of genlock signal the status and the frame synchronizer mode Values Type Blackburst or Tri Sync always Blackburst in SD Status OK or Valid or BAD defined by the EVS server Mode Studio no correction of a shifted vi
149. cess to the secondary speed from the remote controller press SHIFT LEVER TAKE The second lever range is also available when editing the speed of playlist clips Specifies the secondary speed range on the Remote Panel The following values are possible e 100 100 e 0 200 e 200 200 e 0 400 e 400 400 100 100 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Recall clip toggle Description Enables disables the selection of the camera of a clip through the Function keys Pressing several times the F_ key browses to CAM A CAMB CAM C CAM D CAME and CAMF Values Yes No Default value Yes Record key Description Changes the function of the RECORD key on the Remote Panel as described below Values The following values are possible e Start REC Live Pressing the RECORD key starts the record process and switches to LIVE mode e Live Pressing the RECORD key only switches to last recorded picture but the record is not restarted if it has been previously stopped by the operator Default value Start REC Live Pointing device Description Specifies the pointing device connected to the EVS server and initializes it Currently only tablets are supported as pointing devices If the tablet is not properly calibrated this function will re initialize it Value Tablet 3 Multicam Configuration 269 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 270 Issue
150. changes the camera angle User Interface These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window GPI tab e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T6 X The following screenshot displays the Tally settings on the GPI tab in the web based interface TALLY How to Activate the Tally Function To use the tally function proceed as follows 1 Activate it using the Tally parameter 2 Gotothe GPls IN settings area and select the GPI IN used for the tally control 3 Set the Channel Device on the REC on which the Directors Cut is performed 4 Set the function as Mark Tly 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si The tally function is now active and works as follows When the server receives a Mark tally GPI IN an IN point is marked on the corresponding record train for ex cam a When a second Mark Tally GPI IN is received on a different record train for ex cam b the server marks an OUT point on the first record train cam a and an IN point on the second record train cam b All the clips created this way are added to the defined playlist Tally Description Activate or deactivate the tally function Values Yes No Default Value Yes Add Clip to PL Description Selects the LSM ID of the playlist to which the tally clips will be added Values 10 to 99 Default Value 99 Clips guardbands Description Specifies the guardbands le
151. colour for Availability Description Values Default value 3 Multicam Configuration This setting is available with a valid license code 114 or 115 a 8 bit codec and a compatible base configuration Defines the duration and so the speed of the apparition of an incrustation in Painting and Target Tracking modes 00s01fr to 05s00fr 00sO5fr This setting is available with a valid license code 113 anda compatible base configuration Applies the default color to a specific tool either to the cursor or to the border of the wipe effect or to the delimiter of the split screen e Wipe Split e Cursor Wipe Split 279 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Colour Availability Description Values Default Values Custom Y Description Values Default value Custom U Description Values Default value Custom V Description Values Default value 280 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 This setting and the three related custom settings below are available with a valid license code 113 Defines the default color applied to the cursor or to the wipe or split effect according to the Set colour for parameter value e White e Black e Custom defines with the Custom Y U and V parameters White Defines the Y value of the custom color that can be used with the Colour parameter 0 to 255 240 Defines the U value of the custom color that can be used with the Colour parameter 0 to 25
152. connect XHub branch from network Dn Scroll Page Serial Sort Return Rst Stat Space Pause 4 Monitoring 295 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 296 Data Displayed All machines are displayed in the logical connection order i e the way they are effectively connected on the network For each machine the following information is displayed net number name e serial number e main network configuration setting server master or client as defined in the EVS application Background Color The background color of the data related to a given machine means e blue effective server e gray not currently server Text Color The color of the text indicates the video network overload based on how many SDTI network mailboxes are used e white OK Less than 90 of the network capacity is used e red warning Over 90 of the network capacity is used and the network risks to be overloaded Link Color The color of the link indicates the physical link status between two machines green OK e red errors 4 Monitoring Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 Monitoring Possible Actions e Pressing S changes the presentation of the SDTI network and shows alternately a representation based on the serial number or on the topology e Pressing ENTER resets the status information e Pressing SPACEBAR to pause or restart the monitoring e Pressing F5 to
153. corders are disabled in a LongGOP only configuration The base configuration is Server or Spotbox in a LongGOP only configuration 126 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Codec Proxy The Proxy settings and the Mjpeg Proxy codec are available in the following conditions e The server is fitted with an H3X board e The server is fitted with V3X modules e The license code for Proxy 32 is granted on the server License Codes The following table presents the codec availability for an XT3 server depending on the license code The codecs corresponding to license codes 10 to 12 are installed by default on the XT3 server SD codecs V3X Codec Board IMX code 11 vile SOE code 10 DVCPro 50 Beebe Mijpeg Proxy codec code 32 HD codecs V3X Codec Board Mpeg 2 Intra HD code 12 Avid DNxHD Rae Apple ProRes 422 422 LT 422 HQ code 6 DVCPro HD foes AVC Intra code 13 XDCAM LongGOP codec code 14 3 Multicam Configuration 127 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Codec Related Information Bitrates and Recorded Lines in SD 525i SD Mjpeg Codec Type Bitrate Default bitrate Recorded video lines Standard SD IMX D10 20 100 Mbps 30 40 50 Mbps 30 Mbps 30 Mbps 496 lines 512 lines L16 23 L278 525 L7 262 L270 default 525 480 lines L23 262 L286 525 512 lines L7 262 L270 525 Bitrates and Recorded Lines in SD 625i Codec Type
154. cted When the Gigabit connection of the 10GbE board has been lost the last line of the Gigabit IP Configuration settings will display the message Connection problem When the teaming is active and only one of the connection is lost the Gigabit transfers will continue as the second connection will take over seamlessly No warning message is displayed in the Multicam configuration module IP Address Port 1 Port 2 Description IP address to connect to the port1 port2 of the Gigabit Ethernet connection on the EVS server or on the Gateway PC Values The IP addresses 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 are not allowed Subnet Mask Port 1 Port 2 Description Range of logical addresses within the address space assigned to the Gigabit Ethernet connection The IP addresses of both GbE ports must belong to different subnet masks Otherwise Multicam will return an error message Default Gateway Port 1 Port 2 Description IP address of the router on the Gigabit Ethernet network that serves as anaccess point to external networks 198 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 5 5 Gigabit Prioritization Settings NEW Introduction The Gigabit connection is used for several tasks browsing streaming transfer etc For this reason prioritization parameters can be defined to make sure the EVS server will have a sufficient bandwidth to smoothly perform tasks seen as critical within a given
155. d IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec ois PREC eetey Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan 1 1 2 3 Multicam Configuration eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example 1x3G SLSM 2PH 1REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels ina 3G SLSM configuration with 1x3G SLSM 2PH 1 REC 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below On the codec module of the V3X board used both primary and secondary channels are used for each 3G SLSM REC IN 4 OUT 1 IN 3 OUT 2 OUT 3 IN 1 foe i REC1 1 2 3G J8 IN 4B u IN 3B w IN 2B u IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 J4 J3 p J4 J3 J4 J3 Example 3x3G SLSM 2PH 1PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels ina 3G SLSM configuration with 3x3G SLSM 2PH 1PLAY in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below On the codec module of the V3X board used both primary and secondary channels are used for each 3G SLSM REC OUT 1 IN 3 OUT 2 IN 2 IN 1 PLAY REC3 REC2 1 1 2 3G 1 2 3G REC1 1 2 3G IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 J6 IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J7 J8 J7 J8 J J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR our OUT 3B CHAR OUT OUT 4B
156. d and play channels in a 3D Dual Link configuration 1SLSM 2PH 1REC 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below EC e CODEC 3 E CODEC 4 E IN 6 OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 ee eee ia 2A J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J8 J7 IN 6B w IN 5B w IN 4B 95 IN 3B 5 IN 2B om IN 1B 5 Dual Link CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 amp amp REC 5 1 Rec 2B 1 J J J J J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SDIHD SDIHD SD HD SD HD SD HD RRA RARA RR oO J4 J3 J4 J3 q Note q In an equivalent configuration with a 3G interface only the J8 connectors are cabled However the primary and secondary channels on the codec module of the V3X board are both used Available SLSM 2x Configurations in 1080p The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 2 Phase cameras on a XT3 6U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 Hie REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec 2x Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 106 3 Multicam Configuration eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 I
157. d to be able to create a clip The duration can be set e With second granularity up to 1 minute e With minute granularity from 1 minute up to 4 hours 04s00fr If this function is enabled the value of the selected field will automatically be used to name the clip upon creation The values from the following fields can be used to automatically name clips e Disable No name is assigned to a clip when it is created e TC IN The timecode of the IN point of the clip is automatically assigned to a clip when it is created e CAM Name The name of the record channel is automatically assigned to a clip when it is created e ID Louth The ID Louth of the clip i e the unique identifier for the clip on the XNet network is assigned to a clip when it is created e VarlD 32 The VarlD of the clip is assigned to a clip when it is created When this option is selected the VarlD used to assign a name to the clip will be limited to the first 8 characters of this field Disable 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Clip post roll Description When the post roll function is enabled from the secondary clip menu the clip will play through its OUT point for the duration defined by the Clip post roll parameter This is also valid inside record trains if the Record Train OUTs parameter is set to Freeze Values From O0sO0fr to 30s00fr Default value 02sO00fr Mark cue point Description
158. dcast Equipment SA 184 User Description Values Primary TC Description Values OSD Display Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Timecode type stored in the second timecode jump table User TC table In SD o LTC e VITC In HD o EIG HANCLTC e HANC VITC Timecode type that is displayed at the bottom the VGA and is used to work with the video material stored on the given recorder Usually an LTC timecode is used to perform operations on live events A VITC timecode is used for video material ingested from tapes as it is the timecode embedded in the video signal e LTC LTC timecode which is automatically stored in the LTC table It is specified in the LTC field e User User defined timecode which is stored in the USER TC table and specified in the User field Depending on the value selected for this setting the timecode displayed at the bottom of the user s OSD will have a different color e Ifthe LTC timecode is selected the timecode color will be white Ifthe USER timecode is selected the timecode color will be yellow Timecode Insertion Settings User Interface The Timecode Insertion settings allow the management of VITC or ANC timecodes channel by channel These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 7 8 or 9 on the server based application onthe web based interface
159. dec sections can be available Codec Intra It is always displayed as at least an Intra codec is available e Codec LongGOP It is displayed when the LongGOP essence is available e Proxy It is displayed when the Proxy essence is available This essence is always used together with a Hi Res Intra codec User Interface The Codec settings are available on the Server tab in the server based application 18t page and web based interface These settings are not available in the Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Warning The Codec settings require an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows for changes to be taken into account The following screenshot displays the Codec settings defined on the Server tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration 123 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA In Use Description Values Default value Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Specifies in each essence section whether the given essence is encoded or not on the EVS server Yes No Yes in Intra Codec section No in LongGOP Codec and Proxy sections Codec Codec Intra Description Values Default values Algorithm used to compress and decompress the video signal With Intra codecs the compression techniques are performed exclusiverly relative to information contained within the current frame In SD Mjpeg SD e IMX e DVCPro 50 InHD e Mjpeg EVS HD e Mjpeg Standard HD e Mpeg 2
160. deo signal or Resync resynchronization of a shifted video signal About Multi Essence Introduction From Multicam 12 the XT3 server can encode at a time a record train in two different codec types which are called essences The following essences are available Intra and or LongGOP XDCAM or Proxy Lo Res This process is seamless to the user who will go on working as before with the EVS server This section provides an overview of the multi essence feature and mainly specifies the rules and restrictions you should take into account when you configure an XT3 server in multi essence Essence Combinations The essences can be combined as follows e Intra LongGOP e Intra Proxy e Intra only LongGOP only 3 Multicam Configuration 121 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 General Rules e You will only see one record train per record channel and one clip per LSMID even if the record trains and clips exist in several essences on the EVS server e Assingle clip is identical in all available essences e The Proxy essence can not be used as a single essence on an EVS server Recording and Editing Rules When the server is configured in multi essence mode the clips are created in each active essence e In general all editing actions on clips are applied seamlessly on all active essences of the clip Playout Rules Only one essence can be played out at a time The codec used for p
161. des the two line interpolator and the four line interpolator They are not mutually exclusive The two line interpolator reduces the vertical jitter but also the vertical bandwidth The four line interpolator makes it possible to have perfectly steady pictures but reduces even more the vertical bandwidth q Note q All VTRs use interpolation in PLAY VAR mode Vertical Interp Vertical Interpolation Description Enables or disables the two line interpolation process Values e No default e Yes Four Lines Description Enables or disables the four line interpolation process Values e No default e Yes PC LAN Settings User Interface The PC LAN settings allow the MTPC board of an EVS server to communicate and exchange information with other EVS hardware on a setup The PC LAN settings are displayed on the Server tab in the server based application 2nd page and web based interface in the advanced mode 3 Multicam Configuration 137 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 The following screenshot displays the PC LAN settings defined on the Server tab in the web based interface q Note q The PC LAN settings are read only in the Multicam Configuration window You can modify them in the Multicam Setup window using the Set LAN PC address command See section Setting the Server LAN PC Address on page 26 for more information IP Address Description IP address to connect to the port 1 of the
162. des are consequently available e Basic mode e Advanced mode Selecting the basic mode will hide settings on some pages or completely hide other pages To change the display mode in the server based application press F3 To change the display mode in the web based interface click on the display mode label pasenie sss nore Or i 50 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si User Interfaces Server Based User Interface The following screenshot presents the 1t tab and 1St page of the Multicam Configuration window in the server based application shown in advanced mode e The title bar displays the selected configuration and specifies whether the configuration has been launched running or not not running e The selected tab is highlighted in pink The current page and number of pages in the tab are specified in the top right comer e The display mode basic or advanced is specified in the top right corner CONFIGURATION Facility Name 16 INTRA KDCAM NTSC NOT RUNNING 2 CHANNELS 3 NETWORK 4 MONITORING 5 PROTOCOL 6 GPI OPERATION 1 2 Advanced Mode Video and reference Field rate 5 94Hz2 Resolution 1680i Aspect ratio 16 9 LIC timecode 68 23 41519 OK Sync PC time to TC Yes every 66h15 Genlock Blackburst OK Studio Codec Intra In Use Yes Codec AVID DNxHD 145 Bitrate Mbps 145 Horizontal res 1926 pixels Codec LongGOP In Use Yes Codec XDCAM HD 422 Bitrate Mbps 5
163. dio hardware configuration Note that the values defined on this field are not validated against the real hardware configuration Values The following table shows the available audio hardware configurations and the available audio formats based on this hardware configuration Only the values followed by one asterisk are applicable to the new rear panels on XT3 6U servers Only the value followed by two asterisks is applicable to the new XT3 4U servers which can only have this audio hardware configuration Hardware configuration Available formats e None E Embedded EY Dolby E Embedded e 16 XLR A Analog E EY A Analog e 16 XLR D Digital E EY D Digital AES EBU DY Dolby E AES e 16XLRA 8XRLD E EY A D DY e 16XLRA 16BNCD E EY A D DY e 16XLRA 4DB 15D E EY A D DY e 4DB15A 16BNC D E EY A D DY e 4DB15A 4DB15D E EY A D DY e 4DB15D E EY D DY 3 Multicam Configuration 165 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Number of Tracks Warning A change to this parameter requires an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows to be taken into account Description Values Audio Full Scale Description Values Default value Ancillary Mode Availability Description Values Number of mono audio tracks associated to each video channel 4 Monos default 8 Monos or 16 Monos Maximum audio level for the analog outputs on the server in dB It allows indirectly def
164. e 4 Press TAB to shift the focus to the right pane If requested deselect lines you do not want to import o By default all configuration lines present in the lin file will be imported onto the EVS server o To deselect a line use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to highlight the requested line and press SPACEBAR The deselected lines tum light gray and the cross is removed 6 Press ENTER to validate the selection of configuration lines to import A warning message informs you about which configuration lines will be imported and tells the next screen will allow you to select which settings to replace Select Yes using the RIGHT ARROW and press ENTER In the Select settings to replace window select the type of settings you want to import for the selected configuration lines a Press SPACEBAR to select or deselect a settings type b Press TAB to move to the next settings type c Repeat these steps for all settings types you want to import 9 Press ENTER to start the import process 2 Multicam Setup 19 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 In the Web Based Interface Note In the web based interface it is only possible to import configuration lines one by one To import configuration lines onto an EVS server in the web based interface proceed as follows 1 From the Multicam Setup window click Import configuration lines in the Tools menu The Import configuration line window opens
165. e 12 05 D January 2015 196 Teaming Teaming is only available with the 10GbE board on both its 1GbE or 10GbE interfaces Teaming can be enabled using the Link Aggregation setting When teaming is active and one of the GbE link fails the other will seamlessly take over all ongoing and pending tasks Physical Interface Availability This section is only available if the server is equipped with an Gigabit H3X board or a 10GbE board Description Specifies the physical interface that provides the Gigabit Ethernet connection Values The following values are available e None No gigabit interface is present e Gigabit H3X One or two of the 1GbE connection of the Gigabit H3X board is are used e Gateway PC The Gigabit Ethernet connection is provided through the Gigabit Gateway installed on a gateway PC and the 10GbE connector of the gateway PC is used In this case it is not possible to use the GbE connections available on the EVS server e 1 GbE on 10GbE board One or two of the 1GbE connections on the 10GbE board is are used 10 GbE One or two of the 10GbE connections of the 10GbE board is are used Default Value Gigabit H3X 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si levy Link aggregation 3 5 4 Description Specifies the teaming method when using the 1GbE or the 10GbE ports of the 10GbE board Values The following values are available e None No link aggregation method
166. e 199 TwinRec Feature Use of both record channels of each codec module e See section TwinRec Feature on page 147 See section TwinRec on page 145 new setting in Base settings Autosense Function Automatic detection and upconversion of SD video in HD configuration e See section SD Autosense on page 160 See section SD gt HD Conversion on page 162 e See section 4 3 Conversion on page 160 Internal 10GbE Gigabit Ethernet connection e See section Gigabit Connection on page 194 e See section Gigabit IP Configuration on page 197 New Supported SLSM 4x 6x Configurations e New SLSM Rec values for XT3 e Seesection Base Settings on page 141 See section Codec Related Information on page 128 e See section General Information on Supermotion Configurations on page 67 e See section SLSM Configurations on page 69 e See section 3D 1080p SLSM Configurations on page 100 New Supported SLSM 2x 3G XREC Configurations on XT3 6U servers e See section SLSM Configurations on page 69 more precisely XREC configurations on page 81 Epsio Zoom Integration e See section Special Effects Settings on page 278 Vil EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Vill New Supported Configuration with 4K SLSM Recorders See section 4K SLSM Configurations on page 116 Dual Multiviewer e See section Multiviewer Settings on page 203 Record Train Maintenance See section Record Train Maintenance on page 43 e
167. e OSD information to be displayed and the downconverted outputs configuration Setting List The table below presents the settings of the Monitoring tab It specifies where the setting groups are available page and whether each setting is available e inthe basic and advanced display mode in the server based and web based interfaces e inthe Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Setting Name Basic amp Advanced Technical Setup Multiviewer Settings P1 Layout Audio Monitoring from video Audio Monitoring left right tracks DB15 output HD output format SD aspect ratio OSD Settings P1 T Genlock Error X Disk Error Network error x lt Clip name Monitoring Settings P1 T J3 Player Char OUT J3 Recorder Char OUT Char OUT J4 x K X Xx Char OUT J1 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 3 6 2 3 Multicam Configuration V5 Setting Name Basic amp Advanced Technical Setup SD aspect ratio X X SD edge enhancement X X Multiviewer Settings Introduction On EVS servers equipped with V3X boards the two ports available on the rear panels allow the connection of two independent HD SDI multiviewers from Multicam 12 05 This allows the following uses e two operators working independently on the same EVS server e a single operator working with one multiviewer displaying recorders and a second multiviewer displaying players one operator to have a recorder display of a 4K c
168. e SLSM 3 Phase recorder CET e Forthe SLSM 4 Phase configurations one SLSM recorder accounts for one logical channel but corresponds to four physical channels This means that the primary connectors of four codec modules will be used for one SLSM 4 Phase recorder XT3 4U Servers Available SLSM 2x Configurations in 3D The table below shows the available 3D configurations with SLSM 2 Phase cameras on a XT3 4U server The table shows the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 0UT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec ne PRECISERA Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch i Porere RES RP B aR a Se ee OEB DR i IA Ia MR e oe eee 1 0 2 3 Multicam Configuration 101 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 102 Example 3D Dual Link 1SLSM 2x 1REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3D Dual Link configuration 1SLSM 2PH 1REC 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below SLSM 2PH CODEC 2 mm 4 OUT 1 IN3 OUT 2 IN2 OUT 3 IN 1 OUT 4 PLAY REC2 an ere 1A A J7 J8 J7 IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B u IN 1B 5 3D 1080p CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 Dual Link REC2 RECI RECI J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR ouT our 3B CHAR out f our 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD H
169. e Server Based Application To export configuration lines from an EVS server in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press P to call the Export Configuration Lines command The Export Configuration Lines window opens o The left pane allows the selection of the configuration lines to be exported The right pane allows the selection of the location where the export folder will be created on the USB key or on the local drive folder C LSMCE DATA SETUP USER or a subfolder RPORT CONFIGURATION FILES Copy configuration lines in new folder Spothox 4IN 40UT Select where new folder is created C LSMCEN DATANS ETUP USER NewADL 121624 Spothox 4IN 40UT O ooun A aN ee a re A D Export 2 If requested change the name of the folder the configuration lines will be exported to o By default the folder name displayed in the upper right corner follows the pattern lt server facility name_current date gt where the date has the YYMMDD format o Tochange the export folder name type the requested name You can do this any time in the procedure 16 2 Multicam Setup CONFIGURATION V5 MANUAL XTS3 Server 12 05 3 If requested change the selection of configuration lines selected for export on the left pane e By default a cross is displayed in front of all configuration lines which means they are all selected for export Todeselect a line use the UP ARROW
170. e field 4 Monitoring 289 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 4 1 4 Timecode Status Window Introduction This page of the Server Monitoring section provides information on the genlock analog LTC and timecode statuses from the EVS server This page is also used to set up how the timecodes are managed in the timecode jump tables SERVER MONITORING PAGE 3 Genlock status Analog LTC status OK since 09 02 14 20 60 28 22 00 09 22 lt OK gt Drifts 600 TimeCode Status LTC LIC jumps LTC threshold Peak alerts Peak Limit sec Frequency alerts Frequency Number Frequency Time USER jumps USER threshold Genlock Status The Genlock Status section provides the following information e Genlock status OK bad e Date and time when the genlock has been correctly set or restored Analog LTC Status The Analog LTC Status section specifies the current status of the analog LTC timecode as well as the number of drifts detected compared to the genlock The possible status values are the following depending on the MTPC board used Status Description OK The timecode is incremented in a normal way Drift The timecode received and the genlock are not synchronous Bad The timecode received is not correct For example when an NTSC timecode is received instead of a PAL timecode freq error when there are disturbances in the timecode reception bad signal Lost No timecode is available 290 4 Mon
171. e in the advanced mode The following screenshot displays the Phase Definition settings defined on the Server tab in the web based interface SD Standard Definition Description Allows adjusting the digital main phase of the mainframe for the standard definition The value is adjusted by steps of half pixels The values depends on the genlock type See section Video and Reference Settings on page 119 Values e If the Genlock type is set to Blackburst the main phase for SD can be adjusted by steps of half pixels 37 ns between 12000 ns and 15000 ns e If the Genlock type is set to Tri Sync only possible in HD resolutions the main phase for SD can be adjusted by steps of half pixels 37 ns between 30000 ns and 32000 ns 3 Multicam Configuration 135 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 HD to SD SDI SD SDI to HD Description Allows adjusting the secondary phase of the mainframe that is to say the relative phase of the e HD SDI outputs compared to the phase of the SD SDI outputs with a Blackburst genlock e SD SDI outputs compared to the phase of the HD SDI outputs with a Tri Sync genlock This setting only applies to HD resolutions See section Video and Reference Settings on page 119 for more information on genlock type Values e If the Genlock type is set to BlackBurst the secondary phase for HD to SD SDI can be adjusted by steps of half pixels 13 5 ns be
172. e link only with V3X boards the single cable arrives into the primary connector of the codec module On the V3X board both primary and secondary channels of the corresponding codec module are used e For 1080p in Dual Link with V3X boards the first cable arrives into the primary connector of a codec module and the second cable arrives into the secondary connector of the same codec module e For 1080p in 3G single link only with V3X boards the single cable arrives into the primary connector of the codec module On the V3X board both primary and secondary channels of the corresponding codec module are used With EVS servers equipped with V3X and H3X boards only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used but the decoding encoding capability of both channels of the V3X codec module is used without bandwidth restriction In this case full 1080p with native file interoperability is available 100 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si e Forthe SLSM 2 Phase configurations one SLSM recorder accounts for one logical channel but corresponds to two physical channels This means that the primary connectors of two codec modules will be used for one SLSM 2 Phase recorder e Forthe SLSM 3 Phase configurations one SLSM recorder accounts for one logical channel but corresponds to three physical channels This means that the primary connectors of three codec modules will be used for on
173. e rate of 25 fps PAL or 30 fps NTSC The 2 3 40r 6 phases of the camera are ingested in parallel as separate record channels into the EVS server 323 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 324 T Technical Setup menu Menu accessible on the Remote Panel using the FO key It allows users to define currently used configuration parameters U U Motion cameras Also called Ultramotion cameras These are cameras that record at a frame rate ten times higher than the normal frame rate of 25 fps PAL or 30 fps NTSC The ten phases of the camera are ingested in parallel as separate record channels into the EVS server WwW Web Based Multicam Setup interface Web Based interface used to set up and configure the EVS servers The short form is web based interface in this manual This is accessible from any machine PC or server that is on the same network range as the EVS server This can be accessed from a web browser using the following URL pattern http xxx xxx xxx xxx cfgweb where the crosses correspond to the IP address of the PC LAN of the EVS server X XREC This feature allows using the secondary channel of the codec module as an independent record channel Glossary Sa V To learn more about EVS go to www evs com Corporate 32 4 361 7000 North amp Latin America 1 973 575 7811 EVS Headquarters Asia amp Pacific Li ge Science Park 852 2914 2501 16 rue Bois St Jea
174. e server based application e Each tab displays all settings on a single page in the web based interface e The settings on page tab are organized in field groups having a dedicated name 3 Multicam Configuration 49 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Accessing the Multicam Configuration Window In the Server Based Application To access the Multicam Configuration window from the Multicam Setup window when the server is not running proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted 2 Press F8 The Multicam Configuration window opens To access the Multicam Configuration window from the Clips or Playlist window when the server is running press SHIFT F2 In the Web Based Interface To access the Multicam Configuration window from the Multicam Setup window when the server is not running click the Edit icon Ator the configuration line you want to configure The Multicam Configuration window opens The Multicam Configuration window will directly be displayed on the web based interface when the server is running a given configuration You will directly be able to edit the settings for the running configuration Display Mode The settings in the Multicam Configuration window have been categorized as basic or advanced settings depending on whether they are commonly used or not Two display mo
175. ebuild carries on in online mode The operator can also force the disk to be reconnected by starting the rebuild process in the hardware check The process starts offline The operator can wait for the rebuild to be completed or cancel it and start the Multicam application in which case the rebuild carries on in online mode Q Note q If errors are detected during the rebuild process a message appears after the rebuild is complete to warn the operator and the raid is not considered as properly rebuilt In this state the system will keep working on 4 disks 4 1 configuration or on 5 disks 5 1 configuration If you want to run on 5 or 6 disks again you can try replacing the disk again and perform another rebuild or clear all clips If you don t need to retrieve the clips or the record trains you don t need to rebuild the RAID In this case select the Clear All Clips answer when the message with this option appears in the hardware check If you don t rebuild the RAID array or if you don t clear clips the EVS server will keep running on 4 or 5 disks only and you will see a warning message appearing every time you start or close the Multicam application Normal operation can be achieved on 4 or 5 disks but then if another disk fails the system will hang and all video and audio data will be definitively lost Warning By default the online rebuild process takes up 10 of the disk bandwidth If you want to change thi
176. ece ceccececceeeeeees 38 2 5 4 Clearing Video Disks 0 00 cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeees 42 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 5 5 Record Train Maintenance 0 2 cece eee cece cece eee eceeeeeeeees 43 2 5 6 Importing and Exporting Keyword Files 0 00 02 02 e cece eee eee 45 2 5 l Exporting Log FileS 2 222 505 4 deea a os a Mal Soh ieee os take 46 3 MULTICAM CONFIGURATION 0 0 0 0 0 0 020002 2002022 47 3 1 Overview on User Interfaces 2 2 2 2 2 2222 c cece cece eee cece ec ccceeeeeeeee 47 3 11 SINtrOduCtiOn sdear el ol Ae Be Sd SNE BY Bd os 47 3 1 2 Overview of the Multicam Configuration Window 2 22 49 3 1 3 Navigating and Editing in the Multicam Configuration Window 53 3 1 4 Overview of the Setup Menus in the Remote Panel 55 3 1 5 Navigating and Editing in the Setup Menus of the Remote Panel 56 3 1 6 Required Application Reboot 0222222 c cece eee ee cece ceeeeees 57 3 2 Supported Configurations 1 0 0 2 eee eee eee cece cece cece cceeeeeees 59 3 2 1 General Information on Supported Configurations 222222222222022 59 3 2 2 SD HD Base Configurations 000 cece cece cece cece eeeceeees 63 3 2 3 General Information on Supermotion Configurations 67 3 2 4 SLSM Configurations 0 000000 c ccc cc
177. ecessary parameters in the Multicam Configuration window If clips are stored with certain parameters and the operator wishes to change the parameter values afterwards those clips and playlists will not change Configuration with Caution Most parameters are factory preset and should not be modified without advice of qualified EVS staff Improper values for some parameters will prevent the proper operation of the system Parameter Availability Only the parameters or parameter values valid for the given server type server chassis and active license codes are available for defining the various configurations General Comparison Between User Interfaces You can configure the EVS server using one of the three available user interfaces e Multicam Configuration window in the server based application e Multicam Configuration window in the web based interface e Technical and Operational Setup menus in an EVS Remote Panel if any The Multicam Configuration windows in the server based and web based interface are almost identical In the Remote Panel however only the most used technical settings are available in the Technical Setup menu and all operational settings are available in the Operational Setup menu 3 Multicam Configuration 47 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 48 The following table provides an overview on the features available in each user interface Configuration Window Technical Settings O
178. ed and a command is sent to the XFile to save that image The grab can also be activated on the keyboard with the combination CTRL G Yes No No Allows users to convert the function of the BROWSE key The following values are possible e Browse o Without cue points This will directly activate the playlist browse function which is the default function assigned to this key o When cue points are defined This activates the browsing through the cue points defined on the clip or on the record train e Sort TC The system will perform a Sort TC directly The system will not prompt the user with a select menu and it will use the current TC on the channel to search with the last selected criteria If the user wants to perform a search with different criteria Search Net or Local StartDate EndDate CAM CLIP etc the user should use the normal Sort TC selection in the upper menu Browse Specifies the XF 2 where clips must be sent to when using the Archive function from the Remote Panel or VGA screens XF 2 name and network number 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 9 12 Cam Mapping Settings User Interface The Cam Mapping settings allow specifying the settings related to the mapping of network cameras to unused camera positions on the remote up to the camera D These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation
179. ed values stay highlighted in blue and the disabled values are highlighted in pink 2 Onthe keyboard type the page numbers you want to enable They become highlighted in blue 3 Apply the changes with ALT A and confirm the action In the Web Based Interface Navigation and Editing Commands The navigation and editing commands in the web based interface are the commonly used commands in a web based interface The command buttons available are the following ones Command description Command key Activating the Advanced display mode i Basic mode Coming back to the Basic display mode Applying changes Canceling changes 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 1 4 In Server and Web Based Interfaces Display and Checks of Modified Values Once modified the field values are displayed in blue color as long as the changes have not been applied No check on inconsistent or incompatible field values are performed at that stage When you apply the changes the following occurs e The values you have modified are checked If setting values are inconsistent you will get an error message at that stage e The validated values return to the standard color e The inconsistencies are displayed as follows o Inconsistent values are displayed in red o gt A warning message tells you which field value is problematic The page containing the inconsistent field value is then displayed when
180. eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 216 3 7 6 RS422 VarlD Settings 0 00000 c cece eee cece eens 225 SO GPa at echt at ee os i Se Ree aa ed eee 229 OBL OVENI EW sce fh ete eres sess a Aaa iss nes ee 229 3 8 2 GPI Settings 000000 0c c ccc cece cece cece cece ceeccceeeeceeeeeees 230 3 8 3 Tally Settings 00000 0000 e eee eeeeeeeeeees 234 3 9 Operation Tab 0 0 0 ccc e ec ccc ccc eecccc cence cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 3 9 1 Overview 2 2 ccc cece cece ce cece ccc ccc ee eee eeeeeceeeteeeeeeeees 236 3 9 2 OSD Settings 20 00 0000 e ccc cece eniri dre inaa 240 3 9 3 Audio Meters OSD Settings 0000 000 cece cece cece 242 3 9 4 Clips Settings 2 00000 c cece cece cece cececceeeees 244 3 9 5 Playlist Settings 0000 0000 cece cece e ee eeeeeeeeees 250 3 9 6 Timeline Settings 000 000 c cece cece ececeeceeeeees 256 3 9 7 Protection Settings 00 00 e cece eee ceeecceeeeeees 257 3 9 8 Keywords Settings 000000 000 cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 259 3 9 9 Push Settings 0000 0 2 c cece ccc aoaaa aoaaa 261 3 9 10 Audio Settings 0 00 0000 e cece cece eeeeeeeees 264 3 9 11 EVS Controller Settings 2 0 0 0 0 002222 c cece e cece cece eee cece 266 3 9 12 Cam Mapping Settings 0 000002 e cece cece cece ee ee 273 3 9 13 Hypermotion Management 200 2222222 e cece cece cece eee ce cece ee eee 274 3 9 14 Hypermotion Controller Settings 00000 0c
181. efault value V5 Defines the horizontal position of the TC on the screen 0to9 4 Defines the horizontal position of the edit name on the screen 0to15 0 Defines the vertical position of the TC on the screen 0to11 10 Defines the vertical position of the edit name on the screen 0to11 0 RS422 VarlD Settings User Interface The RS422 VarlD settings and the VDCP visibility settings display the read only VarlD settings These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Protocol tab on page 4 in the advanced display mode in the server and web based interfaces Warning The VDCP visibility settings are only available if the license code 119 required to work with the VDCP protocol is valid 3 Multicam Configuration 225 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 The following screenshot displays the RS422 VarlD and the VDCP visibility settings on the Protocols tab in the web based interface VarID Definition and Parameters Warning Please contact the EVS support should you need to change the VarID definition or parameters The VarlD is a 32 bytes ID with variable length and format The VarlID settings enable VDCP protocol to use the VarlD to access the clip IDs on a server or on the XNet network This page in the Multicam Configuration menu only displays the parameter values These values are extracted from the varid ini file and can only
182. el is managed between the main and secondary controllers when it is possible to define main and secondary controllers Values Two control modes are possible e Exclusive mode The main controller can decide at any time to pass the control to or to retrieve the control from the secondary controller e Parallel mode Any of both controllers can take the control as long as the other controller is not executing a command The control can thus be freely passed on from one controller to the other OSD Description Specifies which device main or secondary controller will manage the OSD display characters in parallel mode Values Two values are possible e Main The OSD display is managed by the main controller e Sec The OSD display is managed by the secondary controller 3 Multicam Configuration 151 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 152 Rules for Controller Assignment Main Rules for XT3 server On an XT3 server the following main rules are applicable e InaMulticam LSM base configuration o o All Remote Panels must be the first in the list of main controllers without gap It is not allowed to have another controller preceding a Remote Panel in this list Other controllers can be assigned as secondary controllers to PGMs taking into account the protocol specific rules No more than 4 play channels on an EVS server can be assigned to Remote Panels and no more than 3 play channels can be
183. en configured Port is displayed Note You can only edit the settings when the corresponding Edit Rec play channel is stopped Playlist Settings for Edit Rec User Interface The Playlist settings allow specifying the OSD Settings for Edit Rec on page 224playlist that will be loaded by default when the Edit Rec starts 3 Multicam Configuration 217 218 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 The following screenshot displays the playlist settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab in the web based interface Default PL Description Specifies the playlist loaded by default when the Edit Rec is started Values 10 to99 Default value 60 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Audio Settings for Edit Rec User Interface The Audio settings allow specifying the settings related to the fading applied at the clip boundaries The following screenshot displays the Audio settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab in the web based interface sant EE Edit audio Fade Description Defines the audio effect to be applied to the clip boundaries and included in the clip material Values No V Fade e pMix Default value No 3 Multicam Configuration 219 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 220 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Time Code Settings for Edit Rec User Interface The Time Code settings allow specifying the timecode TC types used in v
184. ength used when generating the SD downconverted output video 0 to 100 66 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 7 Protocol Tab 3 7 1 Overview Protocol Tab The Protocol tab consists of 3 pages in the basic mode and 4 pages in the advanced mode in the server based application The Protocol tab includes the settings that will be used with the Sony BVW75 protocol and the EditRec feature Setting List The table below presents the settings of the Protocol tab It specifies whether the setting is available e inthe basic or advanced display mode in the server based and web based interfaces e inthe Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Setting Name Basic Advanced pects RS422 Protocols Settings P1 P1 T5 1 Id Type X X X Sony BVW Settings P1 P1 T5 2 FFW REW speed X X X Use guardband X X X List Remote CAM X X X SONY Parallel Status X X X Edit Rec 1 2 P2 P3 P2 P3 Port read only read only Playlist Settings P2 P3 P2 P3 T5 X Default PL X X X Time Code Settings P2 P3 P2 P3 T5 X Serial Sony LTC X X Serial Sony VITC X X X Insert TC in SDI X X User TC of created clips X X 3 Multicam Configuration 211 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 212 Setting Name OSD Settings OSD on Output Display sel TC H Pos TC V Pos Name H Pos Name V Pos Audio Settings Edit audio Fade Channel Settings EE Stop Behavior Full EE command value RS422 VarID Settings Unique
185. equested field and SPACE BAR to select the requested value or type the requested value 2 Multicam Setup CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 2 Multicam Setup Field Description V5 The following table describes the fields editable in the Requested Configuration area in the Raid Configuration window The fields are described in the sequence they appear You can select them using the TAB key Field Name Storage type Number of raids Raid configuration type Description Specifies which storage type you will use When both storage types are available the following values are possible e Internal only e External Internal e External only Specifies the number of raids you want to use Type the number of raids you want to use Specifies the raid configuration type The software is able to handle two raid organizations e 4 1 raid of 5 disks e 5 1 raid of 6 disks Current Raid Configuration This area is used to display the raid status for the selected configuration when the EVS server is running a configuration 31 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 4 2 4 1 32 Licenses and Maintenance Overview on Options Codes Management Introduction To run a software application and or specific software options not only the software itself is required but also a license key called license code in Multicam which is unique for every option on every system
186. et In 40 11 Set Out 44 14 IN Preset 44 15 OUT Preset 40 20 Reset In 40 21 Reset Out 40 30 Edit Preset 44 31 Preroll Preset 40 35 Color Frame Select 41 36 Set Timer Mode 40 40 Set Auto Mode OFF 40 41 Set Auto Mode ON 40 9E Superimpose 61 0A Request TCGen 61 0C Request TimeCode 60 10 Request IN 60 11 Request OUT 61 20 Request Status 60 2E Request Speed 60 31 Request Preroll 60 36 Request Timer Mode 5 Protocols V5 Return 10 01 Ack No action 10 01 Ack No action 10 01 Ack No action 10 01 Ack No action 10 01 Ack No action 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack No action 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack 10 01 Ack No action 74 08 GEN TIME DATA 74 09 GEN UB DATA 78 08 GEN TC amp UB DATA 74 00 TIMER 1 DATA 74 04 LTC TIME DATA 74 05 LTC UB DATA 78 04 LTC TIME amp UB DATA 74 06 VITC TIME DATA 74 07 VITC UB DATA 78 06 VITC TIME amp UB DATA 74 10 INDATA 74 11 OUT DATA 7X 20 STATUS DATA 7X 2E COMMAND SPEED DATA 74 31 PREROLL TIME DATA 71 36 TIME MODE DATA 301 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 9 3 302 XTENDD35 Protocol Capabilities The XTendDD35 protocol is a Sony Protocol extension This protocol is able to e preload clips without chaining e create clips e get the server database Characteristics Same characteristics as the Sony Protocol Supported Commands Is
187. ever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec SLSM REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 3x 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 3 0 2 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 2 1 1 2 1 0 3 3 Multicam Configuration 109 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 1080p 3G 1SLSM 3x 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G configuration 1SLSM 3PH 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below With the full 1080p only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used ar a CODEC 2mm eee GODEC S GODEC A AA CODEC Sm IN6 OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 IN3 IN 2 OUT5 IN 1 PLAY REC REC 1 1 3 1 2 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 6B 95 IN 5B 5 IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J6 J J J6 J6 J6 CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUTSB CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 f J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 _ J3 J4 _ J3 i Note In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface both primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled However only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full 1080p configura
188. figuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Connections Unreserved Availability The setting is only displayed in Enabled configuration mode Description Specifies the number of unreserved connections allowed to the Gigabit interface of the EVS server Values The field value is not editable It is automatically adapted depending on the other prioritization parameters A minimum of six unreserved connections are configured to provide the same number of connections as in earlier versions of Multicam Default value N A Example Your setup consists of the following EVS hardware and software products e One EVS server configured in 4REC 2PLAY e Multireview application It requires 1 Lo Res channel per recorder Knowing the connections required by the various applications the person responsible for configuring the setup will set the prioritized connections as follows The Lo Res connections for Multireview will be set to 4 as the EVS server has 4 record channels The unreserved connections are automatically assigned with a minimum of 6 unreserved connections 3 Multicam Configuration 201 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 6 3 6 1 202 Monitoring Tab Overview Monitoring Tab The Monitoring tab consists of one page in basic mode there are no advanced parameters in the server based application The Monitoring tab includes the settings of the Multiviewer output th
189. file is a simple text file with a name of 8 characters and a KWD extension All keyword files must be stored in the C LSMCE DATA KWD directory of the server A sample keyword file SAMPLE KWD is provided by EVS when Multicam is installed You can also import and export keyword files to and from the EVS server via a USB key You can only perform this action in the server based application How to Import a Keyword File To import a keyword file proceed as follows 1 Save the keyword file you want to import on a USB key and plug it into the USB port of the EVS server as the Multicam Setup window is open In the Multicam Setup window press K to call the Import export keyword file command The following dialog box opens Import Export Keywords Files Files on USB Files on Server Sya ENTER Import on Server If several keyword files are stored on the USB key press SPACEBAR until the requested file is selected on the left field Press ENTER to import the keyword file from the USB key to the EVS server Press OK to close the message box that appears when the keyword file has been imported Remove the USB key 45 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 5 7 46 How to Export a Keyword File To export a keyword file proceed as follows 1 Plug a USB key into the USB port of the EVS server as the Multicam Setup window is open 2 Inthe Multicam Setup window press K to call the
190. following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Protocol tab on page 1 in the basic and advanced display mode in the server and web based interfaces e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T5 X Warning The Sony BVW settings are only available if the license code 118 required to work with the Sony protocol is valid The following screenshot displays the Sony BVW settings on the Protocol tab in the web based interface FFW REW speed Description Specifies the speed used by the protocol for forward and rewind operations Values 2 to 50 times the normal speed Default value 50 Use guardband Description Makes the OUT guardband available to the protocol Values e Yes meaning that the protocol has access to the IN and OUT guardbands e No meaning that the protocol has only access to the IN guardband Default value No 3 Multicam Configuration 215 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 7 5 216 List Remote CAM Description Allows access to the CAM recorders of the remote server specified in the XNet field Values e Yes meaning that the recorders of the local server and the remote server are available e No meaning that only the recorders of the local server are available Default value No SONY Parallel Status Description Activates the Sony serial connection status reporting when several controllers are used in parallel mode Values Yes No Default value
191. gGOP codecs the compression techniques are performed relative to information contained within the current frame but also to information relative to other frames in the group of pictures GOP XDCAM HD 50 See section Bitrate on page 313 6 Truck Manager Plugin 313 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Codec Proxy Codec Description Algorithm used to compress and decompress the video signal in low resolution It is used for remote browsing purposes It is not possible to run an EVS server with the Proxy essence only Values Mjpeg Bitrate See section Bitrate on page 313 6 6 Channels Area Introduction This section describes the various settings available in the Channels area Once you have specify the requested values for the various settings click the Apply button to apply the values remotely to Multicam Base Settings Inputs Description Number of logical record channels in the given configuration The partition of the disk storage between these channels and the advanced audio settings are automatically adapted to the number of record channels Values The number of supported channels depends on the chassis and the mode e OnXT3 0 6 Spotbox 1 6 LSM See section General Information on Supported Configurations on page 59 for more information on number of record channels and on supported configurations 314 6 Truck Manager Plugin ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si
192. h Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 4 XREC configurations 1 2 4 N e A Example 2xSLSM 2PH 2 REC 2 PLAY MIX XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 2xSLSM 2PH 2REC 2PLAY MIX in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below IN6 OUT 1 IN 5 IN4 IN3 IN2 OUT 5 IN 1 sos dee REC REC REC 2 2 2 1 1 1 J8 J7 J8 J7 J7 J8 J7 IN 6B w IN 5B w IN 4B 5 IN 3B 5 IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC REC 4 3 J J J J6 CHAR out our 1B CHAR our our 2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 i J4 J3 i J4 i J3 p J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i J4 R J3 3 Multicam Configuration 79 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 3xSLSM 2PH 2 PLAY MIX XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration with 3xSLSM 2PH 2 PLAY MIX in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below IN6 OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN 4 IN3 OUT 4 IN2 OUTS5 IN1 a PLAY ves a REC amp REC amp 2 2 1 2 1 1 J8 J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 6B w w IN 4B u IN 3B w IN 2B 5 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC REC 3 2 3 1 J6 J6 CHAR our f our 1B CHAR ouT our 2B CHAR ouT our 3B CHAR ouT f our 4B CHAR OUT OUT5B
193. h aoe hd 302 DA OOCICS aarti ce teut tS Ae Sls Seec ane ere eS arto se edca eet boon 303 55 VG Res at Po Sa ee Oe Rn pe Pee Ae ee 304 6 TRUCK MANAGER PLUGIN 0 0 00 00 00 22 22 307 63 1 IMtNOGUCHION n Senses Tones sel sg doe Soon a Mannan Med aes Agee A aae 307 6 2 Plugin Overview 00 0000 cece ccc ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeees 308 6 3 Contextual MENU ne zeae tt ep hs ihe ee ie Le Ait bois oti ts cada e 310 6 4 Configuration Area 0 0 2 c cece cece cece cece cece ce ccececeeeeeeeees 311 6 5 VSenenAlea teste Se eo ek AE eat oD Std SIE EO i es 312 6 6 Channels Area s lt xn 2eis os aaa seat lobule iat an a a die ink 89 Sn tas 314 6 7 Network Area 22 2 o oaaao haaha aoaaa aLa aLL LLDD ec eeececeseceseeecaee 318 GLOSSARY eect ek ee eit a A 321 Table of Contents eat V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si What s New What s New In the Multicam Configuration manual the icon NEW has been added on the left margin to highlight information on new and updated features in release 12 05 The changes linked to new features in version 12 05 are listed below Integration with Truck Manager EVS server configuration via the Multicam plugin in the Truck Manager application e See section Truck Manager Plugin on page 307 Gigabit Prioritization Feature Prioritization of transfers from to the Gigabit FTP server See section Gigabit Prioritization Settings on pag
194. hannel on one multiviewer and a player display of the 4K channel on the second multiviewer for example The Multiviewer settings make it possible to specify the settings for the two multiviewers such as the number of channels to combine and display the audio and output video configuration Q Note q On EVS servers with the latest rear panels the Multiviewer connectors are labeled OUT1 and OUT2 On EVS servers with former rear panels the OUT1 connector is labeled HD SDI and the OUT2 is labeled SD SDI User Interface These fields are available in the Multicam Configuration window Monitoring tab Q Note q The Multiviewer settings will only be displayed if a Multiviewer board is present on the EVS server The following screenshot displays the Multiviewer section on the Monitoring tab in the web based interface 203 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 NEW Multiviewer 1 2 204 Maximum Number of Sources The cumulated number of sources displayed in the two multiviewers may not exceed 12 channels If the requested layouts are not supported Multicam will display an error message For this reason the following layout combinations are not supported e 8 Multviewer 1 8 Multiviewer 2 e 8 Multviewer 1 6 Multiviewer 2 e 6 Multviewer 1 8 Multiviewer 2 Layout Description Specifies how the sources are displayed on the Multiviewer 1 or Multiviewer 2 Values The following layou
195. he V3X codec module is used without bandwidth restriction In this case full 1080p with native file interoperability is available e For 1080p in 3G single link only with V3X boards the single cable arrives into the primary connector of the codec module With EVS servers equipped with V3X and H3X boards only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used but the decoding encoding capability of both channels of the V3X codec module is used without bandwidth restriction In this case full 1080p with native file interoperability is available XT3 4U Servers Available 3D Configurations The tables below show the available 3D configurations with standard cameras on XT3 4U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan 3 Multicam Configuration eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example 3D Dual Link 2REC 2PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 3D Dual Link configuration 2REC 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below CODEC 2 iam OUT 1 IN 3 OUT 2 IN 2 OUT 3 IN 1 oe PLAY REC REC 2A 2A 1A J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 4B u IN 3B 5 IN 2B 35 IN 1B 95 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 CHAR SD J1 REC REC 2B
196. he audio meters on the OSD Values Yes No Default value Yes DB Adjust Description Adjusts the value of the displayed audio meters Values From 83 2 to 0 0 dB with a variable increments larger in low values and smaller with increasing values Default value 0 0 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Style Description Values Default value Thickness Description Values Default value 3 Multicam Configuration Specifies the style of the audio meters Light Bars Glowing Boxes Dark Boxes Light Boxes Dark Bars Light Bars Specifies the thickness of the audio meters Thin Medium Thick Thin 243 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 9 4 244 Clips Settings User Interface The Clips settings relate to various aspects of the clip management clip definition storage location metadata and cue points The Clips settings are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on pages 1 and 2 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational menu of the Remote Control Panel 2 X The following screenshot displays the Clips settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Automake clip for CAM A B C D E F Availability
197. hen an HD resolution is selected in the open configuration The SD Autosense setting allows Multicam to automatically detect and upscale an SD feed and record it in the HD codec selected in the open configuration Yes No default When the SD Autosense setting is enabled the following features are not supported on the EVS server e Replace function with internal loop in playlist SHIFT LOOP onthe LSM Remote Panel e Paint function e Target Track function e Internal offside line NEW 4 3 Conversion Availability Description Values Default value 160 This setting is only available when the SD Autosense setting is enabled The 4 3 conversion setting allows users to specify how Multicam will convert the source aspect ratio when e Multicam detects the source aspect ratio is 4 3 full frame and e Multicam is configured to manage the conversion automatically SD gt HD conversion setting is set to Auto The following values are possible e Pillarbox Left and right stripes are added to the source video to display it in a 16 9 pillar box aspect ratio Crop Top and bottom ends of the source video are cropped to display it in a 16 9 full frame aspect ratio Pillarbox 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 SS REC Capacity Warning A change to this parameter requires an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows to be taken into account Descripti
198. how the clip name is displayed Values VarID Name Default Name Monitoring Settings User Interface The Monitoring settings allow specifying the settings related to the monitoring output lines and the parameters linked to HD SD down conversion These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Monitoring tab e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T4 2 The following screenshot displays the Monitoring settings on the Monitoring tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration a V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si J3 player Char OUT Format Description Allows modifying the behavior of the J3 connector on V3X codec modules used as player channels One of the following behaviors is possible e Clean downconverted output initial behavior e Monitoring output same behavior as J4 Values The following values are available for the Char OUT setting e No J3is used with its initial behavior e Yes J3is used as a monitoring output same as J4 With V3X boards the value is forced if a single behavior is possible The values for the Format setting is read only and corresponds to the actual output format Default value No J3 recorder Char OUT Format Description Allows modifying the behavior of the J3 connector on V3X codec modules used as recorder channels One of the following behaviors is possible e Loop of input initial behavior
199. i 3 Multicam Configuration 87 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 MEF Available 3G SLSM 6 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 6U server A single 3G cable transports both phases and is connected to the primary connector of the codec module on the rear panel This accounts for two channels on the V3X board The table shows the channel assignment at the level of the V3X board IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 AEC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec ees MREC EEAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 XREC configurations 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 2 1 1 2 1 0 3 Example 1x3G SLSM 6PH The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM configuration with 1x3G SLSM 6PH need to be cabled as shown below On the codec module of the V3X board used both primary and secondary channels are used for each 3G SLSM REC OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 IN2 OUTS5 IN 1 OUT 6 REC 1 REC 1 REC 1 5 6 3G 3 4 3G 1 2 3G J8 J J7 J8 J8 J7 J8 J7 IN 6B w u IN 4B 35 IN 3B 5 IN 2B 95 IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J6 J6 CHAR our our 1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUTS5B CHAR OUT OUT6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SDHD SD HD SDHD J4 i J3 i J4 i J3 i
200. i Critical Mul_Incrust mC_Sdtilser Critical Mul_Player_ mC_Cn1LgRec Critical Mul_Player_1 Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical mC_Cn1lLgPly Critical Mul_Player_2 4 Monitoring 293 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Log File Types The left column displays items related to microcode The right column displays those of the Multicam Each item has two associated log files e aregular log file e alog file logging only errors Criticality Levels Each item has a criticality level that can be modified e The lowest and default level of criticality is Critical where the log is limited to recording critical and important commands This is the default value for all items e Anintermediate level is Normal e The highest level is Debug which basically records every command This highest level should never be chosen without advice of qualified EVS staff You can press SHIFT F1 to access a help screen that provides information on all commands available in this window Warning When you have to switch to Debug mode first reproduce the problem then extract the logs and finally switch back to the default Critical mode Extracting Log Files This window also offers the ability to extract log files when the Multicam is running When the Log Management window is open press E to ext
201. iguration parameters for each configuration line you will need In this step you will define among others the channel configuration for the selected configuration line as well as audio and video parameters for the EVS server For more information see section Multicam Configuration on page 47 When Starting the EVS Server After Initial Configuration After the initial configuration you will select a configuration line and press ENTER to run the server in this configuration See section Launching a Configuration on page 12 As soon as the EVS server is launched in a configuration it starts the loop recording process Accessing the Web Based Interface Prerequisite When the EVS server is started you can access the web based interface of the Multicam Setup application for that EVS server from any computer on the same network range as the EVS server You can use any browser to open the web based interface Procedure To be able to open the web based interface in a browser you need to know the IP address of the PC LAN of the EVS server See section Setting the Server LAN PC Address on page 26 for more information In your browser enter the following URL http xxx xxx xxx xxx cfgweb where the crosses correspond to the PC LAN IP address of the EVS server you want to access EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 2 1 2 1 1 Multicam Setup Overview of User Interfaces Overview of the Setup
202. ing Dolby E is correctly synchronized with the video Dolby E transitions will not be correct 2 frames of mute at the transitions if the audio type is set to E instead of EY or D instead of DY Audio effects scrub slow motion are not possible in Dolby E If they are used anyway the audio will be muted 182 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 4 4 Timecode and Data Insertion Timecode Settings User Interface The Timecode settings allow specifying which type of timecode the users want to use as the reference to work on a given recorder of an EVS server The selection of a timecode type using the timecode settings rely on the management of two timecode jump tables These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 6 7 or 8 on the server based application onthe web based interface e partly in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 X The following screenshot displays the Timecode settings defined on the Channels tab in the web based application LTC Description Longitudinal timecode timecode defined on or plugged into the EVS server automatically stored in the first timecode jump table LTC table This is not possible to modify the timecode type stored in the first timecode jump table Values LTC non editable 3 Multicam Configuration 183 EVS Broa
203. ing process 3 Multicam Configuration 169 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 170 Example 1 The E2 03 value located in the intersection between row 3 and column IN2 means that the 3rd audio mono channel of the embedded audio source plugged into the IN2 CAMB connector will be recorded on the same position on the EVS server Example 2 The allocation of the source audio mono channels shown above means that The embedded audio source of the 1St mono channel of the record channel IN1 or IN2 will be stored on mono channels 1 to 4 of the recorded material The embedded audio source of the 5 mono channel of the record channel IN1 or IN2 will be stored on mono channels 5 to 8 of the recorded material 3 Multicam Configuration a V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example 3 INi IN2 CAM A CAM B 61 The allocation of the source audio mono channels shown above means that e The audio source from the digital connectors is used for the material recorded on the EVS server The audio source 1 from the digital connector will be mapped to the 1 t mono channel of the material recorded on the EVS server and so on Example 4 You will allocate the source audio mono channels as shown above when you want to send the audio mono channels from REC1 to all other record channels The shortcut CTRL 0 allows you doing this more rapidly in the server based application Audio Outpu
204. ings relate to various aspects of playlist management and effects These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 2 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel 3 X 250 3 Multicam Configuration a V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si The following screenshot displays the Playlist settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface Availability The Playlist settings are only available if the license code 111 or 112 is valid Some playlist settings are tied to the code 112 and will therefore not be available if the license code is not valid You can also create and manage playlist exclusively via protocols In this case the playlist settings will not be available and all playlist related parameters will be defined by the controlling application or device Video effect duration Sets the duration of video transition effect The specified value is used as default value in the Playlist Edit mode Note that the duration of the video transition when using the TAKE button in 1PGM PRV mode has its own parameter Effect for take defined in the EVS Controller section of the Operation tab Description Values OsOOfr to 20s00fr Default value 00s 10fr 3 Multicam Configuration 251 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D
205. ining the head room as the audio full scale is 4 dB higher than the head room As the default value for the audio full scale is 22 dB the default value for the head room is 18 Range of values 10 30 dB 22 dB This setting is displayed in SD configurations Encoding method used for digital audio 20 Bits 24 Bits default Sample Rate Conv Conversion Description Values 166 Specifies whether the input sample rate is converted This parameter is only available with the digital AES EBU audio format If this parameter is set to No the user has to ensure that the signals are properly synchronized Yes default No 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Audio Monitoring Mon 1 Mon 4 Description Specifies the source of the audio signal that will be sent to each of the four audio monitoring connectors numbered from left to right on the backplane Value For each audio monitoring connector the audio signal to be monitored is specified by the video channel number and the audio mono channel number Example The value OUT1 01 for Mon 1 means that the audio signal of the 1St audio mono channel of the PGM1 is sent to the monitoring connector 1 Default Values By default the audio signal of the first play channel and the audio mono channels from 1 to 4 OUT 1 01 to OUT 1 04 are respectively assigned to the Mon 1 to Mon 4 connectors Overview on Advanced Audio
206. ion Dte gt fault to UGA ReCb gt oot Enable password for technical settings Selected configuration summar Server information Mjpeg EUS CHD 166Mb 7 XDCAM HD 422 S Mb Genlock Ok 16861 59 94Hz 8 monos TC 07 40 44 28 OK Multicam LSM 4in 4out LAN PC 172 16 54 4 SDTI 4 T 4 MG4 Master gt ALT Q Exit FisHelp The following screenshot presents the Multicam Setup window in the web based interface V MULTICAM SOFTWARE a CONFIGURATION xx vivje awaa a aaa T i XXXXXXXXXXXXXX vvrvvYYYYYYYYYY N aaa gg Evs enor IPMENT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 2013 o 2 Multicam Setup 7 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Description of the Areas The table below describes the various parts of Multicam Setup window Name of area 1 Title bar 2 Configuration Lines 3 Tools 4 Configuration Summary Description The title bar displays the following information e Multicam version e server facility name if any e chassis type e server serial number This area shows all configurations the EVS server can run e 16 configurations lines are available on an EVS server A default configuration is defined behind all configuration lines even if no name is assigned to the configuration line e Each configuration line contains all configuration parameters which allow a very flexible configuration of the EVS server See section Configuration Lines on page
207. is not accessible from the A button Values The following values are possible e Yes The PGM PRV mode is available from the A key on the Remote Panel e No The PGM PRV mode is not available from the A key on the Remote Panel Default value Yes Internal loop mode Description Defines which components of PGM1 output must be recorded back into the server when the Loop mode is engaged Values The following values are possible e Video Audio Both video and audio signals of PGM1 are recorded back into CAM A input e Video only Only the video signal of PGM1 is recorded back into CAM A input This allows the operator to continue the record of live audio tracks during the Loop process This can be useful to add music voice or live sound to an edit for example Default value Video Audio Note L In audio embedded the audio is always looped whether the loop mode is set to Video Audio or Video only 3 Multicam Configuration 271 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Grab image Availability Description Values Default value Browse button Description ys Values Default value Default XFile Description Values Default value 272 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 This setting is only available if the license code 117 is valid Enables disables an image grab when the MARK key on the Remote Panel is hit and when a default XFile has been assigned Each time the MARK key is used a cue point is mark
208. isplay mode on page 3 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel 6 1 Warning The Keywords settings are only available if the license codes 124 and 125 are valid The following screenshot displays the Keywords settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration 259 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Keyword files Description Values Default Values Keyword mode Description Values Default Values 260 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Specifies the keywords file that can be used to assign keywords to clips or to search the clips database The following values are possible No keywords file is selected and the keyword assignment and related search functions are not available SERVER The keywords file sent by the active EVS server to all systems on the SDTI network will be used This value is only available if the SDTI network is used lt Keywords file name gt Other file names will appear if keywords files files with a KWD extension have been loaded in the C LSMCE DATA KWD directory of the system Keyword files can be imported using the Import Export Keyword Files function in the Multicam Setup window See section Importing and Exporting Keyword Files on page 45 for details about keyword import export function See the Keyword Management section in the Multicam
209. itoring Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 4 Monitoring Timecode Status Introduction The Timecode Status section displays the settings for managing and monitoring the timecode jump tables Records are created in these tables when a break or jump in the timecodes occurs in the recorded material The records in the timecode jump tables are then used to search for and manipulate the video material on the XT3 server There are two timecode jump tables e Timecode jump table for the LTC timecodes e Timecode jump table for the timecodes specified by the user in the Multicam Configuration module Channels tab Timecode Settings area User field See section Timecode Settings on page 183 for more information on this setting LTC Timecode Default LTC Description Values LTC jumps Number of timecode jumps calculated inthe LTC timecode 1 jump table for the given recorder since the last start of the server LTC threshold Number of continuous timecodes to be received after a 50 break in LTC timecodes in the recorded material in order to create a new record in the LTC timecode jump table Peak alerts Number of peak alerts generated for the recorder since the O last start of the server A peak alert is generated each time the peak limit specified in the Peak Limit field is reached In this case this field is automatically incremented by one Peak limits Period of time in seconds of continuous timecodes after
210. ity name in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press F to call the Assign server facility name command A dialog box opens Facility Name ENTER validate ESC quit without saving 2 Type the server facility name and press ENTER The facility name is directly assigned and displayed in the Title bar as well as on the OSD In the Web Based Interface To assign a server facility name in the web based interface proceed as follows 1 From the Multicam Setup window click Assign server facility name in the Tools menu A dialog box opens 2 Type the server facility name and press OK The facility name is directly assigned and displayed in the Title bar as well as on the OSD Activating and Deactivating the Password Protection Activating the Password on the EVS Server Introduction The administrator can protect the EVS server with a password This password protection prevents unauthorized users from changing configuration settings It does not prevent from using operational commands The password protection can only be activated and deactivated from the server based application 2 Multicam Setup Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 Multicam Setup The password protection has the following impact on the various user interfaces The password is required to apply changes to configuration parameters in the server based application and in the
211. l when working in Dolby audio to assign a timeline track to the stereo pair and the other track to the Dolby 5 1 audio Protection Settings User Interface The Protection settings aim at protecting clips stored on the EVS server from deletion These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 3 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel 5 1 The following screenshot displays the Protection settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface G Protect pages Description Specifies the pages on which the clips stored are protected from accidental deletion The clips stored on these pages are also protected when using the Clear All Clips F7 function from the main menu of the Remote Panel See section Navigating and Editing in the Multicam Configuration Window on page 53 for more information on how to enable pages Values Page 1 to 10 0 Several pages can be selected Warning When the option Clear Video Disks is selected in the Multicam Setup window of the server based application all clips are deleted including the protected ones 3 Multicam Configuration 257 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Clip edit by network Availability This setting is only available if the license code 117
212. layout After performing the field counter maintenance All the trains are erased but neither the clips nor the playlists are erased e Multicam restarts the recorders that were running before the maintenance operation e Multicam restarts the players that were running before the maintenance operation The record train used by each player remains unchanged Automatic Advance Warning As the recorders and the players will stop if the field counter reaches its limit warnings are automatically issued in advance 1 12 weeks before the counter overflow VGA A message is displayed once 2 From 8 to 4 weeks before the counter overflow VGA a message is displayed once every week 3 From 4 weeks to the day before the counter overflow o VGA a message is displayed once every day e OSD a Rec warning is continuously displayed on all PGM OSD screens 2 Multicam Setup ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 5 6 2 Multicam Setup 4 One day before the counter overflow o gt VGA the message is repeated o OSD the Rec warning flashes on all PGM OSD screens Field Counter Overflow When the field counter reaches the overflow Multicam stops the recorders and the players Multicam issues error messages on the VGA the OSD and the LSM The operator is allowed to browse and make clips with all the content available on the disks Importing and Exporting Keyword Files Introduction The keyword
213. layout is specified in the Server tab after the codec sections e When the Intra essence is in use on the server this essence is played out Otherwise the LongGOP essence is played out e Ifthe on air essence is not available a black clip is displayed e The Proxy essence is never played out Limitations With LongGOP Codec When working with an SLSM configuration in multi essence Intra LongGOP the Intra codec records all phases and the LongGOP codec records only the regular speed content not SLSM from phase 1 With Proxy Codec Dolby E is not supported in Proxy essence If audio channels are configured in Dolby E in a multi essence configuration with Proxy the Proxy output will have no associated audio Q Note q The Lo Res audio is Mpeg 1 Layer II at 48 kHz sampling frequency 122 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Codec Settings Introduction From Multicam 12 the XT3 server can encode at a time a record train in one or two different codec types which are called essences Possible Codec Sections The codec settings are organized in three codec sections which correspond to the essences you can activate on the XT3 server Only the codec sections corresponding to the essences available on the EVS server will be displayed See section Codec Availability on page 126 for more information on the availability of a given codec and or codec section The following co
214. le of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS aaao aoaaa aooaa ccccececececccceceees III WHAT S NEW ana On ee ee ee n naana Vil 1 INTRODUCTION cg epee cccay sage cs oes cap edday une wes 12100021211200 1 1 1 Introduction to the Configuration of EVS Servers 0 20000 cece eee cece ee 1 1 2 Introduction to the Manual 0 0 22 ccc cece cece cece cece ceeececeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 3 Starting the EVS Server l 0 000000 e cece cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 4 Accessing the Web Based Interface _ 2 222200 5 2 MULTICAM SETUP aaa aaao e ccc ec cece cece cececececeeeeees 6 2 1 Overview of User Interfaces _ 202 22020 o occ ccc eee eee 6 2 1 1 Overview of the Setup Areas 22 00 00 22 cece cece ccc ccc ccccccceeceeeeeeeeees 6 2 1 2 Navigability and Commands 2 2200000 e cece cece e ee ceeeeeceeeeee 9 2 2 Configuration Lines aa00000000000000000000000000000 00o noron ononon ronan onnenn 11 2 2 1 Chapter Contents 2200 2 0 2 0000000000000200 2222222222222 11 2 2 2 Launching a Configuration 1 2 0 0 0000 c cece cece cece e eee e eee eeeeee ees 12 2 2 3 Editing a Configuration 0 02202 c ccc eee cece eee ee cee eceeeeeeeee 13 2 2 4 Renaming Configuration Lines 0 0 0 0 00 cc eee cece eee e ee eee ee ee ees 15 2 2 5 Exporting and Importing Configuration Lines 20 2222222 16 2 2 6 Changing the Position of Configuration Lines 0
215. lled on the EVS server e Verifying the validity of the data recorded on the video disk array The hardware check is only available in the server based application Tip Hardware check is also used to rebuild the video and audio information after replacing a faulty disk Process The hardware check runs the same steps and checks as the server boot process 1 MTPC check 2 H3X check 3 Video Codec check 4 Quad booting 5 GbE download 6 Disk check 7 Data loading After you have launched the hardware check by pressing H in the Multicam Setup window the system automatically starts the test process One after the other the various steps are displayed in the BOOT H3X window The test process is completed when the H3X board is initialized At the end of the hardware check the hardware revisions information is displayed The information is logged in the bootwins log 2 Multicam Setup V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Disk Errors and Disconnection Disconnection When one disk of the video raid array has sustained errors Multicam automatically disconnects that disk and uses the parity disk to rebuild the missing data and provide the video and audio data blocks to the application The operator can thus continue working normally and the message Raid appears on all monitoring outputs A message is displayed each time a disk is disconnected e if the faulty disk is a spare disk Warning a sp
216. ls with NA correspond to impossible configurations taking into account the existing constraints In this case the Hypermotion option is not available in the operational menu even if the Hypermotion setting is set to Yes 3 Multicam Configuration 275 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 9 14 276 Hypermotion Controller Settings User Interface The Hypermotion controller settings allow specifying the settings related to the control of a hypermotion camera from an LSM Remote Panel These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 5 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel pages 11 X Warning The hypermotion feature and settings are only available if the license code 20 which allows controlling a hypermotion camera from the remote panel is valid The following screenshot displays the Hypermotion Controller settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface Hypermotion Description Enables or disables the hypermotion camera control feature When this setting is enabled you can access and use the hypermotion menu on the LSM Remote Panel via the SHIFT D key combination in the operational menu Values Yes No Default Values No 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3
217. ly from the Remote Control panel Configuration Available from Server Web and Remote Panel You can configure the EVS server using one of the three available tools The server based application VGA features all settings and commands for the setup and configuration e The newly designed web based interface is equivalent to the server based application and enables engineers to configure the EVS server remotely The Remote Panel now includes e atechnical setup menu that gives access to the most commonly used technical settings e an operational setup menu that only provides operational settings The following table gives an overview on the features available in each user interface EVS Server Configuration Configuration Window Setup Window Technical Settings Operational Settings Server Based Yes Yes Yes Application tabs 1 6 tab 7 Web Based Yes Yes Yes Interface except some tabs 1 6 tab 7 Tools commands Remote Panel No Yes Yes Technical Setup FO Setup Menu SHIFT D 1 Introduction 3 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 1 2 1 3 Introduction to the Manual Documented User Interfaces The Server Configuration manual deals with all user interfaces used to configure Multicam server based application web based interface and Remote Panel e On the one hand the information on navigability and editing commands specific to the user interface is described in clearly
218. m Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec INE Fase tan Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch rect a sect a sect Oo 1 Tf sect Mi sect mi sect 0o 2 mE seor k seor 0 8613 Tooo g 0 4 3 Multicam Configuration 63 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Example 3REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a standard 3REC 1PLAY configuration need to be cabled as shown below eet CODE Cl m COE maa OUT 1 IN3 IN2 IN 1 ie pa REC 1 J8 J7 IN 4B ua IN 3B ua IN 2B ua IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD v1 J J CHAR our our 1B CHAR ouT f our 28 CHAR OUT OUT3B CHAR OUT OUT 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 J3 p J4 i J3 J4 p J3 J4 p J3 Available XREC Configurations IN4 OUT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 0 et HH hl co EY i Pe e Ra oc a a a a s 2 E Poo A lt 2 E a M gt gt B M a Be REC PLAY Example 6REC 1PLAY XREC The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels ina REC 1PLAY XREC configuration need to be cabled as shown below me EC aren rp SOPECS IN 4 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 4 PLAY a 1 J7 IN 4B 5 IN 3B u IN 2B u IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 iad a eg J CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR our f our 28 CHAR our f oUT3B CHAR our f OUT 4B SD HD SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 E
219. me e User The user name is a label for information s sake only e Chassis type Type of mainframe If this value is wrong audio and video routing inside the system will not work properly e PSU type Type of PSU installed on the chassis standard or hot swap e Key date and time Expiration date amp time for temporary license codes Not available when the permanent codes are installed Central area All codes available for the given server chassis Next to each code name the code number the type of license permanent temporary demo or not granted as well as the expiration date are mentioned Lower area Area where you can enter new license codes manually The commands on how to import new license code from files are specified 2 Multicam Setup 33 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 In the Web Based Interface The window features two areas which contain the information mentioned below Area Description Central area All codes available for the given server chassis for which a license key has been granted and is still valid Next to each code name the code number is mentioned Lower area Area where you can enter new license codes manually or upload a license code file 34 2 Multicam Setup ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 4 3 2 Multicam Setup Entering and Removing License Codes Introduction When you request new license codes to activate one or more
220. me Basic Advanced eer i Four Lines x x PC LAN settings ie 5 P41 IP Address g Subnet Mask z x XxX XxX Default Gateway Video Codecs and Reference Video and Reference Settings User Interface The Video and Reference settings are available on the Server tab in the server based application 1St page and web based interface These settings are not available in the Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel Warning Most Video and Reference settings all except Sync PC time and Genlock require an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows for changes to be taken into account The following screenshot displays the Video and Reference settings defined on the Server tab in the web based interface Field Rate Description Field frequency used Hz Both field rate and resolution give the video standard Values 50 00 Hz PAL default 59 94 Hz NTSC 59 94 Hz J 3 Multicam Configuration 119 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 120 Resolution Description Values Aspect ratio Description Values Default value LTC Timecode Description Values Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Vertical resolution used number of white to black and black to white transitions that can be seen from the top to the bottom of the picture pixel type Both field rate and resolution correspond to the video standard With an XT3 server SD and HD video standards can be available if the relevant li
221. me Calling a tool command ENTER on the selected command In the Web Based Interface q Note L To be sure that changes have been taken into account in the web based interface refresh regularly the page by clicking the Refresh button in the status bar 10 2 Multicam Setup CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Configuration Lines Command description Renaming the configuration line Entering the Configuration window to edit the settings related the configuration line Deleting the configuration line Starting the server with the corresponding configuration line Tools Menu V5 Command icon Mk N o To call a Tools command simply click on the command in the Tools menu This will open the corresponding window 2 2 Configuration Lines 2 2 1 Chapter Contents The table below presents the topics of this section and shows whether the feature described is available from the web based interface and or from the server based interface Section Launching a Configuration Editing a Configuration Renaming Configuration Lines Exporting and Importing Configuration Lines Changing the Position of Configuration Lines Copying Pasting and Deleting Configuration Lines 2 Multicam Setup Page 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 2 2 7 Server Based Web Based Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes one by one Yes indirectly Yes indirectly EV
222. ment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 9 6 256 Load Playlist Description This parameter is only used in 2PGM or 3PGM mode Values The following values are available Always This always loads the selected playlist in PGM PRV mode e Conditional This loads the selected playlist on the selected PGM only if only 1 channel is active when entering the Playlist Edit mode It allows loading and playing multiple playlists using a single Remote Panel Default Value Always Timeline Settings User Interface These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 3 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel 4 1 The Timeline settings relate to the audio groups in timelines The following screenshot displays the Timeline settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface Timeline rel st Mono per group Description Defines how many audio mono channels are associated to each of both audio tracks of a timeline Values The following values are possible depending on the value defined for the Number of tracks setting in the Channels tab tracks Possible values 4 2 8 4 default 2 6 6 2 16 8 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 9 7 q Note q The 2 6 feature is particularly usefu
223. mode the clip capacity is shared between the different record trains Example When 3 record trains are used creating a clip of 30 min on REC1 will take 10 min of recording capacity equally from each record train e Per channel In this mode the clip capacity is only relevant to the individual record train Example When 3 record trains are used creating a clip of 30 min on REC1 will take 30 min of recording capacity from the 1St record train but will not affect the recording capacity of the other two record trains Default value The default value depends on the base configuration e Global locked o in LSM configurations in Video delay configurations in Spotbox configurations e Per channel o with 2 ch VTR o in Server configurations Rec Auto Start Availability This setting is displayed when a Spotbox or Server configuration is running Description Automatic start of the record channels after the EVS server has initialized Values Yes default No 3 Multicam Configuration 159 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 CEMT SD Autosense Warning A change to this parameter requires an application reboot ALT Q from the operational windows to be taken into account Availability Description Values Limitations This setting is available in the following conditions e with all HD codecs and all multi essence configurations e with an EVS server equipped with V3X and H3X boards e w
224. module On the V3X board a 1080p connection is connected as follows e Only the primary channel of the codec module COD A on the V3X board is used The connection to the secondary channel is no longer necessary since the full 1080p video is included in a single file on the EVS server 3D 1080p Standard Configurations Assignment Principles On the rear panel side the following rules on connector assignments apply to 3D or 1080p configurations e For 3D in Dual Link with V3X boards the first cable arrives into the primary connector of a codec module and the second cable arrives into the secondary connector of the same codec module On the V3X board the same logic applies to the corresponding channels of the codec module For 3D in 3G single link only with V3X boards the single cable arrives into the primary connector of the codec module On the V3X board both primary and secondary channels of the corresponding codec module are used e For 1080p in Dual Link with V3X boards the first cable arrives into the primary connector of a codec module and the second channel arrives into the secondary connector of the same codec module 3 Multicam Configuration 93 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 REC PLAY piim 94 With EVS servers equipped with V3X and H3X boards only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used but the decoding encoding capability of both channels of t
225. n B 4102 Seraing Other regional offices Belgium www evs com contact EVS Broadcast Equipment is continuously adapting and improving its products in accordance with the ever changing requirements of the Broadcast Industry The data contained herein is therefore subject to change without prior notice Companies and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies
226. n areas which give access to the configuration lines and the most used maintenance commands V l MULTICAM SOFTWARE SUPPORT CONFIGURATION E CAST EQUIPMENT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 2013 1 Introduction 1 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 e a configuration section for each configuration line It is presented in seven tabs which easily give access to all configuration parameters J ES omutticam SOFTWARE Simple User Interface The user interface is simple and clear thanks to e the separation of basic and advanced parameters The most commonly used parameters are displayed in a basic mode while more specific parameters are hidden and can be displayed when you toggle to the advanced mode e the filtering of the parameters displayed The parameters are only displayed when they are applicable to the chassis type the video standard and option codes 2 1 Introduction ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Parameter Changes While Server is Running Changes to most parameters can be performed and are taken into account while the server is running Easy Audio Configuration The audio configurations are open and easily configurable as it is possible to e modify the audio parameters while the server is running e configure individual outputs for Embedded Digital and Analog audio e configure audio monitoring settings direct
227. nd timecode status OK or bad e IP address of the LAN PC Navigability and Commands In the Server Based Application General Navigability The following table presents the general commands to navigate in the Multicam Setup window Command description Command key Moving the cursor to the first item of the Tools menu F9 Moving the cursor to the first configuration line ESC Moving down in the list of editable items TAB configuration lines and Tools commands Moving up in the list of editable items SHIFT TAB Displaying a Help window that gives a summary of F1 the commands EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Configuration Lines In the Configuration Lines area a configuration line is highlighted when it is selected The main commands for configuration line management are presented below Command description Command key Moving up in the list of configuration lines UP ARROW Moving down in the list of configuration lines DOWN ARROW Starting the server with a given configuration line ENTER on selected line Entering the Configuration window to edit the settings F8 related to a selected line Renaming a configuration line CTRL F1 Deleting a configuration line CTRL DELETE See section Configuration Lines on page 11 for more commands on configuration lines Tools Menu Command description Command key Selecting a tool command Pressing the shortcut key between brackets in the command na
228. ness Length Format VDCP visibility Settings Port 1 6 Basic P2 P3 X P2 P3 P2 P3 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Advanced beri P2 P3 T5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X P2 P3 T5 X X X P2 P3 75 4 T5 7 X X X X X X P4 read only read only read only P4 read only 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 7 2 3 Multicam Configuration RS422 Protocols Settings User Interface The RS422 Protocols settings allow specifying the settings related to the clip identification used to access the video clips These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Protocol tab on page 1 in the basic and advanced display mode in the server and web based interfaces The following screenshot displays the RS422 Protocol settings on the Protocols tab in the web based interface RS422 protocols aie Id Type Description Specifies the clip ID used by the protocols to access and identify the clips Please note that at any time the VDCP protocol can decide to use either the default value or the VarlD see RS422 VarlD Settings See section Clip Identifiers on page 214 for more information on clip identifiers Values ID LSM e UmiD Default value ID LSM 213 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 7 3 214 Clip Identifiers LSM ID The LSM ID is a clip identifier
229. ngth of the tally clips in seconds Values 0 to 250 Default Value 0 3 Multicam Configuration 235 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 9 3 9 1 236 Operation Tab Overview Operation Tab The Operation tab consists of six pages in the basic mode in the server based application No advanced mode is available in this tab The Operation tab includes all operational settings Setting List The table below presents the settings of the Operation tab They specify where the setting groups are available page and whether each setting is available e inthe basic or advanced display mode in the server based and web based interfaces In the web based interface the settings are all displayed on one page inthe Operational Setup menu of the Remote Panel OSD Settings Operational Setting Name Basic Setup OSD settings P1 1 1 Cue Number on OSD X X Keyword info X X OSD on outputs X X OSD on inputs X X Background X X Audio meters OSD settings P1 1 2 Audio Meters DB Adjust Style Thickness 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Clips Settings Setting Name Basic ee Clips settings P1 to P2 2 x Automake clip for cam A B C D E F P1 X Make clips rem trains P1 X Guardbands P1 X Default clip duration P1 X Autoname clips P1 X Clip post roll P1 X Mark cue points P1 X Preroll P1 X Record trains OUTs P1 X Default copy move P1 X Freeze on cue points
230. nk and license code 24 for 3D 3G Description Activates the 3D option using the Dual Link or the 3G SDI standard This option makes it possible to use the server to record and play back 3D video Values Yes No default 3 Multicam Configuration 145 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 3G Dual Description Values Default value Warning Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Defines the interface the EVS server will use with the 3D or 1080p standards e The Dual Link interface consists of a pair of HD SDI serial links and provides a bitrate of 2 970 Gbit s e The 3G SDI interface consists of a single serial link that provides 2 970 Gbit s The following values are possible but their availability depends on several conditions e No available in all cases e Dual Dual Link for 1080p o Available with V3X modules H3X board o Available with code 21 1080p resolution e Dual 3D Dual Link for 3D o Available with code 23 3D setting to Yes e 3G Level A 3G SDI for 1080p in one 3G stream native file interoperability o Available with V3X modules H3X board o Available with code 22 or 27 1080p resolution e 3G Level B 3G SDI for 1080p in two HD streams native file interoperability o Available with V3X modules H3X board o Available with code 22 or 27 1080p resolution 3G 3D 3G SDI for 3D o Available with code 24 3D setting to Yes No Only the configurations explicitly allowed by the license codes can be started
231. nserted into the User TC for the created clips Values e Edit TC e User Default value Edit TC 3 Multicam Configuration 221 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 222 Channel Settings for Edit Rec User Interface The Channel settings allow specifying the settings related to the channel behavior The following screenshot displays the Channel settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab in the web based interface EE Description Activates the EE Electronic to Electronic mode the signal being recorded is played on the output channel without any delay Values Yes No Default Value Yes Stop Behavior Description Defines the channel behavior when it is in stop mode Values e PB playback The EditRec playlist is displayed on the EditRec output EE The EditRec input passes through the server and is displayed on the EditRec output Default Value PB 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Full EE command value Description Allows to specify whether the Full EE command is applied on the audio and or to the video The Full EE command makes it possible to view the source connected to the EditRec through the EditRec outputs without any audio or video delay From a practical point of view this command allows the operator to select the IN and OUT points of the sources and of the recorder from a single monitoring window EditRec output Values The following value
232. ntify each field being encoded in the server This counter will overflow after 2 years and 8 months at 50 Hz or 2 years and 3 months at 59 94 Hz when the server is in continuous use When the field counter reaches its limit the recorder and the player stop It is possible to close the current file and start a new one without the need to clear the video disks as required in earlier versions of Multicam nor to exit Multicam 43 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 44 How to Reset the Field Counter You can reset the field counter from the Multicam Setup window or from the Multicam Configuration window To reset the counter from the Multicam Setup window proceed as follows 1 Gotothe Clear video disk dialog box 2 Select Clear only record trains See section Clearing Video Disks on page 42 To reset the counter from the Multicam Configuration window proceed as follows 1 Inthe VGA press SHIFT F5 to open the Server Monitoring window 2 Inthe General Information page page 1 select the Reset record train command See section General Information Window on page 285 Impacts of the Field Counter Maintenance During the field counter maintenance e The players that are using content from local clips are not be disturbed e The players that are using content from a remote XNet server are not disturbed e Playing out a record train of the server in field counter maintenance on a remote server will impact the p
233. ntroduction The following contextual menu is available when you click on the contextual menu icon in the Multicam plugin in Truck Manager The contextual menu provides general commands and commands specific to Multicam Reset Export Import Copy Paste Clear video disks Clear only Intra clips Clear only LongGOP clips Clear only record trains Cancel clear video disks Command Description The table below describes the various commands of the contextual menu Command Name Select that command to Reset Reset the values defined in the plugin to the values currently defined in the Multicamapplication Export Export all setting values associated to the Multicam application to a cnf file named according to the following pattern lt Name gt lt ProductName gt cnf Import Import the setting values stored in a cnf file into the application plugin Copy Copy to the clipboard the parameters associated to the Multicam application Paste Paste to another application the parameters previously copied to the clipboard Clear video disks Delete all clips playlists and record trains on the EVS server when users launch a new configuration 6 Truck Manager Plugin Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 6 4 Command Name Select that command to Clear only Intra clips Delete all clips and playlists in an Intra essence on the EVS server Clear only LongGOP Delete all clips and playlists ina LongG
234. oRes up to 102 Mbps 68 3 Multicam Configuration Ea V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 2 4 Enhanced Playout Mode On EVS servers equipped with H3X and V3X boards and running a frame codec both channels of a V3X codec module can be used in specific conditions to increase the decoding performances during a replay This enhanced playout mode is configurable per channel and is available in SLSM configurations The way to enable and use the enhnaced playout mode is described in more details in the short section Enhanced Playout Mode on page 62 SLSM Configurations Introduction SLSM Principles This section details the available multi phase SLSM configurations on XT3 servers In SLSM configurations a supermotion recorder of a two three four or six phase camera accounts for one logical channel but corresponds respectively to two three four or six physical channels In 3G SLSM configurations a supermotion recorder of a two phase or six phase camera accounts for one logical channel On the rear panel it uses respectively one or three connector s and is cabled on the primary connector of the codec module On the V3X board it uses both primary and secondary channels of that codec module In U Motion configurations an ultramotion recorder of a ten phase camera accounts for one logical channel but corresponds respectively to ten physical channels Introduction to the Configurations The following secti
235. on This parameter contains two types of information on the specified recorder Recording Capacity XX percentage of the disk space allocated to each channel Loop No Loop indicates whether the Loop Recording parameter is enabled or not Values The following values are possible e Recording Capacity The value is defined by the user The total of all values must not exceed 100 By default the recording capacity is evenly distributed among all recorders Example In a 2 REC 4 PLAY configuration the recording capacity will be 50 for each recorder by default e Loop No Loop e The value directly depends on the Loop Recording setting o If the Loop Recoding is enabled the value will be Loop o If the Loop Recording is disabled the value will be No Loop 3 Multicam Configuration 161 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Co SD gt HD Conversion 162 Availability Description Values Default values Introduction Availability This setting is only available when the SD Autosense setting is enabled The SD gt HD conversion setting makes it possible to specify how Multicam converts the aspect ratio of aSD source video to an HD video format With this parameter you specify the conversion mode and type Conversion mode o Auto Multicam automatically converts the aspect ratio based on the source aspect ratio detected in AFD or WSS o Forced Multicam applies the aspect ratio conve
236. on fal and the parameters can be modified and saved for the browser session 25 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 3 4 26 Deactivating the Password on the EVS Server Once the password protection is active it can only be deactivated from the server based application as follows 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press W to call the Enable password command A message opens to warn you that you are about to remove the password protection CAUTION A password will no longer be required to modify technical settings Are you sure lt Yes gt 2 Press the RIGHT ARROW key to select Yes and press ENTER 3 Type the password in the dialog box that opens and press ENTER to validate Please enter the password lt Esc gt Cancel lt Enter gt Validate The password protection is directly removed from all user interfaces Setting the Server LAN PC Address Introduction The MTPC board of an EVS server allows interaction with other EVS hardware on a setup via the LAN PC address The port 1 of the MTPC board is used The communication is established through telnet or FTP access XNet Monitor will also use the LAN IP connection to transfer the monitoring data Q Note q You can only define the settings associated with the LAN PC address from the server based application 2 Multicam Setup Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Settings The MTPC board connection settings
237. on other EVS servers Only one EVS server on the network should be set to Server type If no Server type is defined on the network XNet will not be established If more than one EVS server is defined as Server type only the first one to connect will be the actual Server Whatever the server type defined the content of an EVS server can be accessed without restrictions by the other EVS servers with type Master or Server on the SDTI network Default value Server High Priority Description Defines a higher priority for a play channel of the local server whenever they play network clips trains This higher priority will only apply in play not in shuttle mode Values Yes No default Q Note q Using this command will not prevent a freeze on the SDTI network if the network is completely stalled It is always worth checking the network status and defining clear network usage rules if you wish to play footage across the network 3 5 3 Gigabit Connection Introduction The Gigabit connection allows the backup and transfer of the audio and video data without going through the SDTI network The Gigabit Connection settings specify which interface provides the gigabit connection on the EVS server 194 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si The Gigabit connection is provided via one of the following interfaces having the following characteristics e The internal 10GbE board is equipped with two 1
238. ons show the available SLSM and U Motion configurations with an XT3 6U server and XT3 4U server e The tables show the channel assignment at the level of the V3X board e The examples show how the BNC connectors should be cabled for a selected configuration The XREC configurations presented at the end of the tables make use of the secondary channel of the codec module on the V3X board as an independent record channel See also the section Channel Assignment in XREC Configurations on page 62 Note q Specific SLSM configurations for 1080p 3D dual link and 3G configurations are presented in the section 3D 1080p SLSM Configurations on page 100 3 Multicam Configuration 69 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 XT3 4U Servers Available SLSM 2 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3 4U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 ae Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec on REC PLAY Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan 1 0 0 REC RECHT 1 1 0 2 0 2 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 2 XREC configurations 3 0 1 70 3 Multicam Configuration a V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server
239. onto a drive available from your PC 2 From the Multicam Setup window click Options code management in the Tools menu to open the Options code management window 3 Click the Browse button select the COD file and click Open 4 Click Submit The license codes will be read from the local file and updated into the system The lines corresponding to the new codes area added to the code list How to Enter License Codes with a Key Number In the Server Based Application To enter a new license code delivered via a key number proceed as follows 1 From the Multicam Setup window press O to open the Options codes management window 2 Type the code you have received It will automatically be typed in the Validation Code field Validation code 3 Press ENTER Next to the line corresponding to the activated codes the license type and the expiration date if any are displayed In the Web Based Interface To enter a new license code delivered via a key number proceed as follows 1 From the Multicam Setup window click Options code management in the Tools menu to open the Options code management window 2 Type the code number in the first field of the Add new code group box 3 Click Submit The lines corresponding to the new codes are added to the code list 36 2 Multicam Setup ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 2 2 Multicam Setup How to Remove a License Code Yo
240. operational manual for details about the keywords file format and keywords related functions keywords file not selected Specifies the keyword assignment search mode on the EVS Remote Panel The following values are possible List It will display the keywords by groups of 8 onthe LCD of the Remote Panel and the operator can select them with the corresponding F_ key Numeric It doesn t display the keywords list on the LCD but allows the operator to enter directly the keyword ID using the F_ keys The Numeric mode is faster when the operator knows the position of the keywords inside the keywords file either from memory using the VGA keyword screens or using a print of the keywords list List 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 amp CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 9 9 Push Settings User Interface The Push settings relate to the management of the Push function on the EVS server The Push function allows users to easily send a copy of a clip to another machine on the network via the GbE network or the SDTI network These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 3 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel 7 1 Warning The values available in the Push settings depend on the presence of the SDTI hardw
241. or DOWN ARROW key to highlight the requested line and press SPACEBAR The cross is removed and the deselected lines turn light gray 4 Press TAB to shift the focus to the right pane 2 Multicam Setup If requested change the location where the export folder will be created o By default the export folder is created on the USB key root or on the local drive folder the local drive folder C LSMCE DATA SETUP USER To change the folder where the export folder will be created highlight the requested folder The last highlighted folder will be considered as the requested location To start the export process press ENTER 7 When the selected lines are exported as a lin file a message opens to confirm the export Click OKto acknowledge the message In the Web Based Interface q Note q In the web based interface it is only possible to export configuration lines one by one To export configuration lines from an EVS server in the web based interface proceed as follows 1 From the Multicam Setup window click Export configuration lines in the Tools menu The Export configuration lines window opens EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 Click Export next to the configuration line you want to export In the File Download dialog box click Save 4 Select the location where you will save the export configuration file lin file and if requested change the file name 5 Click Sa
242. ow the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN4 0UT1 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN1 OUT4 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec ees AS salen Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 XT3 6U Servers Available SLSM 2x Configurations in 3D The tables below show the available 3D configurations with SLSM 2 Phase cameras ona XT3 6U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 ZREC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec is REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 a i Pee 1 2 0 104 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 IN6 OUT1 AREG Prim Sec SLSM REC PLAY Ch Ch 2x 2 0 0 1 3 0 2 1 0 1 4 0 REG REG 5A 5B 2 2 0 REC REC 4A 4B 3 0 0 REC REC 3 2A 3 2B 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 0 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 0 2 1 0 3 1 1 3 1 0 4 3 Multicam Configuration IN5 OUT2 Prim Sec Ch Ch REC REC 4A 4B REC REC 3A 3B REG REC 4A 4B REC REC 3A 3B REC REC 3 1A 3 TB REC REC 4A 4B REG REG IN4 OUT3 Prim Sec Ch Ch REC REC 2 2A 2 2B REG REG 3A 3B REG TIIREC 2 2A 2 2B RECH REC 3
243. owever only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full 1080p configurations XT3 6U Servers Available 3D Configurations The tables below show the available 3D configurations with standard cameras on a XT3 6U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec 96 Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 3 Multicam Configuration VE CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Erei IN6 OUT1 INS5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch SF Fees ee eee a OEO a a E OR Ea Ee i eee l EE 3 Multicam Configuration 97 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 IN6 OUT1 INS5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Example 3D Dual Link 3REC 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 3D Dual Link configuration 3REC 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below E e y maaan OEC AEE OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 OUT 3 IN3 IN2 eel ee J8 J7 J8
244. perational Settings Server Based Yes Yes Application tabs 1 6 tab 7 Web Based Yes Yes Interface tabs 1 6 tab 7 Remote Panel Yes partly Yes Technical Setup FO Setup Menu SHIFT D Overview on Configuration Parameters The first topic of each section in the Multicam Configuration chapter gives you an overview on the parameters available in this section and specifies whether you will find the parameter e inthe basic or advanced view in the server based application and the web based interface e inthe Technical Setup Operational Setup or not at all on the Remote Control panel The following list provides a hyperlink to all overview topics in the various sections e Server settings e Channels settings e Network settings e Monitoring settings e Protocol settings e GPI settings e Operations settings 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 1 2 Concurrent Modifications in the Remote Panel and the Server Based Application When a parameter is modified with the Remote Panel and that parameter is not in conflict with the parameter modified in the Configuration page of the server based application the following message will be displayed on the VGA The configuration has been modified by another user without any conflict Your copy has been updated with these modifications When a parameter is modified with the Remote Panel and the parameter is in conflict with the par
245. ples The advanced audio settings are presented as a table In the table the information is organized as follows The rows correspond to the audio mono channels of the A V material stored on the EVS server The number of rows depends on the value assigned to the Number of tracks setting defined in the Audio settings field group The columns correspond to the record channels or play channels The values in the cells show the rooting of the audio mono channels o from the source to the material stored on the EVS server audio inputs o from the material stored on the EVS server to the play channels audio outputs 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si The values in the cells of the table for example E1 01 are made up as follows e The first letter refers to the audio type E for embedded D for digital A for analog DY for Dolby Digital EY for Dolby Embedded The first number before the hyphen refers to the play or record channel e The figure after the hyphen refers to the audio mono channel Audio Input Settings Introduction The advanced audio input settings allow users to specify the following elements e Which type of audio source should be taken into account in the recording process e How the audio mono channels of the source material will be distributed to the material recorded on the EVS server e Whether an audio gain or audio muting should be applied in the record
246. pment SA I Epsio Description Values Default value IP address Description Values Default value Default tool Availability Description Values Default value 282 Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Activates or deactivates the control of Epsio application from the remote when the Offside line parameter is set to Yes e None No Epsio interactivity e Live offside line This enables the Epsio Live application including the offside line The SHIFT D key gives access to the Epsio Live menu Zoom This enables the connection to Epsio Zoom to create zoom sequences using Epsio Zoom external tool The SHIFT D key gives access to the Epsio Zoom menu None Defines the IP address of the Epsio workstation on the network when the Epsio connection is enabled via the Epsio parameter XXX XXX XXX XXX 192 168 10 50 This setting is not available with Epsio Zoom Selects the tool used by default in the Epsio Live menu on the remote when the Epsio Live connection is enabled via the Epsio parameter e Offside e Arrow e Circle e Graphics Offside 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Auto mark Description Activates deactivates the automatic insertion of a cue point on the record train every time the Epsio operator enters the Epsio menu on the remote Values Yes No Default value No 3 Multicam Configuration 283 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 0
247. r of white to black and black to white transitions that can be seen from the top to the bottom of the picture pixel type Both field rate and resolution correspond to the video standard With an XT3 server SD and HD video standards can be available if the relevant license codes are activated Values InSD e 525i e 625i In HD e 720p e 1080i e 1080p only available with code 21 or 22 In 3G UHDTV 4K 312 6 Truck Manager Plugin CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Codec Intra Codec Description Values Bitrate Description Values V5 Algorithm used to compress and decompress the video signal With Intra codecs the compression techniques are performed exclusiverly relative to information contained within the current frame In SD Mjpeg SD e IMX e DVCPro 50 InHD e Mjpeg EVS HD e Mjpeg Standard HD e Mpeg 2 Intra HD e Avid DNxHD 120 185 or 185x only in 50 Hz e Avid DNxHD 145 220 or 220x only in 59 94 Hz Apple ProRes 422 422 LT 422 HQ e DVCProHD e AVC Intra 100 See section Codec Availability on page 126 for detailed information on codec availability Number of megabits processed per second Mbps The bitrate depends on the codec See section Codec Related Information on page 128 for detailed information on bitrates per codec Codec LongGOP Codec Description Values Bitrate Algorithm used to compress and decompress the video signal With Lon
248. racks Values Yes No Default value No 3 Multicam Configuration 253 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Extend split transition Availability Description Values Default value This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid Determines how the transition should be extended when the transition duration on the audio or video track only is modified This parameter is only useful when performing split audio editing The following values are possible e Center on Cut Extends equally on both sides of the transition End on Cut Extends the beginning of the transition to the left so that the end of the transition is unchanged Start on Cut Extends the end of the transition to the right so that the beginning of the transition is unchanged e Ask Allows the operator to select any of the above options when editing the duration of the transition Center Cut Swap audio tracks Availability Description Values Default value 254 This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid Defines whether the audio tracks to swap are automatically or manually selected when performing split audio editing with at least 4 mono audio tracks per video The following values are possible e Auto The audio tracks to swap are automatically selected by the application when inserting a swap point This is the default value in 4 audio configurations e M
249. racts the log files instantly so that a user can access them through a common FTP client application from a remote computer The extracted files are located in C LSMCE DATA LOG Their name starts with an underscore The regular log file Multicam Database logis renamed Multicam_ Database log once extracted when the application is running q Note q You can extract logs from the XNetMonitor for any server running on the XNet network For more information refer to the XNetMonitor manual 294 4 Monitoring Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 4 2 SDTI Network Monitoring 4 2 1 Overview on SDTI Network Monitoring Windows The SDTI Network monitoring windows can be accessed via the server based application when the EVS server is running in a given configuration To access the SDTI Network Monitoring section press SHIFT F4 It consists in the following pages e The SDTI Network Schema page 1 shows a schematic representation of the SDTI network e The Hardware Error Counters page 2 provides a list of the hardware for which an SDTI related error has been returned 4 2 2 SDTI Network Schema Overview This page shows a schematic representation of the SDTI network This allows you to check the SDTI network status and to see how hardware devices are interconnected on the SDTI network SDTI NETWORK MONITORING 2 XT2_PGE i XT 2 29 amp File 629836 626416 Loc 673136 66153 M A 86153 M 66153 Dis
250. rat LongGOP Intrat LongGOP Proxy Intra Required Optional Required Source Config intra Optional Optional Required LongGOP LongGOP Optional Required Required Intrat Optional Optional Optional Proxy 42 2 Multicam Setup Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 SS 2 5 5 2 Multicam Setup In the Server Based Application To clear video disks in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press C to call the Clear Video Disks command 2 Select one of the available options and press ENTER A confirmation message is displayed 3 Press RIGHT ARROW and ENTER to select Yes and validate the deletion OR Press ENTER to cancel the deletion Q Note q After a Clear Video Disks action the command toggles to Undo Clear Video Disks At Next Start as long as your server has not been rebooted after the Clear Video Disks command This allows you to cancel the Clear Video Disks request In the Web Based Interface To clear video disks in the web based interface proceed as follows 1 In the Multicam Setup window click the Clear video disks command from the Tools area to open the Clear Video Disks window 2 Select one of the available options and press OK A confirmation message is displayed 3 Click Yes to validate the deletion or No to cancel the deletion Record Train Maintenance Preventing the Overflow of the Record Trains Field Counter The record train uses a counter to ide
251. ration line you want to delete The configuration line is directly deleted 2 Multicam Setup ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 Multicam Setup Server Parameters Chapter Contents The table below presents the topics of this section and shows whether the described features are available from the web based interface and or from the server based interface Commands Page aerer ee Based Based Assigning a Server Facility Name 2 3 2 Yes Yes Activating and Deactivating the Password 2 3 3 Yes No Protection Setting the Server LAN PC Address 2 3 4 Yes No Setting the Server Date and Time 2 3 5 Yes No Setting the Default Output To VGA Video 2 3 6 Yes No Configuring Server Raids 2 3 7 Yes No Assigning a Server Facility Name Introduction You can assign a facility name to the EVS server It allows the identification of the EVS server with a dedicated name besides the server s serial number This name is independent from any configuration The server facility name differs from the server net name which can vary from a configuration to the other as it is defined in the configuration parameters The server facility name is displayed in the title bar of the Multicam setup and configuration windows as well as on the OSD on screen display 23 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 3 3 24 In the Server Based Application To assign a server facil
252. rations with 4 or 16 tracks mono channels the audio mono channels of the A V material stored on the EVS server are sent to the digital audio output connectors of the play channels as presented in the table below The table shows maximum number of players and an audio configuration with 16 tracks mono channels Mono1 Mono2 Mono3 Mono4 Mono5 Mono6 Mono7 Mono Mono9 Mono10 Mono11 Mono12 Mono13 Mono14 Mono15 Mono16 OUT 1 OUT 2 D01 D005 D02 D06 D03 D07 D04 D08 None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None OUT 3 D 09 D10 D11 D12 None None None None None None None None None None None None OUT 4 OUT5 OUT6 D 13 D 14 D 15 D 16 None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Audio Analog By default the audio mono channels of the A V material stored on the EVS server are sent to the analog audio output connectors of the play channels as presented in the table below The table shows the maximum number of players and an audio configuration with 8 tracks mono channels OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT3 OUT 4 OUT5 OUT6 Mono1 A01
253. re but perhaps to the server being too prompt to disconnect a drive you must run a hardware check immediately after ending the session during which the disk was disconnected Don t rebuild the RAID but press simultaneously the ALT L keys to generate the log file C LSMCE DATA LOG SCSI LOG and send this file to EVS for detailed analysis Note that this procedure is only valid if the drive is disconnected during operation not for a drive being disconnected when booting the system 40 2 Multicam Setup Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Rebuild Process Introduction The XT3 server is capable of performing a rebuild process of the RAID This process can happen either while the Multicam application is not running offline process rebuild is faster or while the Multicam application is running online process rebuild is slower Disconnection Process As explained in the section Disk Errors and Disconnection on page 39 the software will disconnect a disk that does not behave as expected Two options are available for the operator e Replace the disconnected disk and restart the server Start the Multicam application The rebuild process will start automatically Start a hardware check from the EVS menu and launch the rebuild The process starts offline The operator can wait for the rebuild to be completed or cancel it that is to say postpone it and start the Multicam application in which case the r
254. ressing R to call the Raid Configuration command in the Tools menu RAID configurationlticam Setup 11 50 5 Use Internal only 1 5 1 gt raids spares Use Internal only RAID type Arrays Status 1 541 raids spares EXT4 status 4 ee ee eee Disks status Display raids Highlight RAID T4 a The Requested Configuration area in the upper part of the window displays the default raid configuration You can modify the default raid configuration in this area You will find more information on editable parameters below The Current Configuration area in the lower part of the Raid Configuration window provides raid and disk status information Default Raid Configuration At the first start the software builds the raids using the following settings e If internal and external storage are detected both are used e 5 1 raid configuration with a maximum of 5 spares is used First all the raids are built The remaining disks are used as spare disks The construction of raids starts with internal arrays and carries on with external arrays A raid can be created across several hardware arrays Requested Raid Configuration Overview In the Requested Raid Configuration you can modify the following parameters in the default raid configuration e Use of internal and or external storage e Use of spare disks e Number of raids to be used To modify one of these parameters press TAB to select the r
255. roadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 CleanVBI Description Specifies whether the VBI Vertical Blanking Interface information needs to be cleaned on the output The VITC being recorded in the active video lines it can be disrupted in play var because of interpolation or parity violation on some fields Moreover if the server inserts VITC on the output while there is already VITC on another line it can create problems Values e No default The VBI is not cleaned in the output e Always The VBI is always cleaned in the output The VBI is cleaned in the output if it is not e IfnotOK correct play var mode vertical split screen etc SMPTE Package Settings User Interface The SMPTE Package Management settings specify how ancillary data packets stored in the vertical ancillary data space in HD and SD signals are handled These fields are available in the following interfaces inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 6 7 or 8 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e partly in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 X The following screenshot shows the SMPTE Package settings defined on the Channels tab in the web based application 188 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Supported Packets The supported ancillary data packets must comply with the SMPTE standards 334M 291M
256. rsion specified in the Conversion type Conversion type The conversion type specified is always used in Forced mode and can be used in Auto mode when the source aspect ratio cannot be detected in AFD or WSS o Anamorphic The source video is converted to a 16 9 aspect ratio o Pillarbox Left and right stripes are added to the source video to display it ina 16 9 pillar box aspect ratio Crop Top and bottom ends of the source video are cropped to display it in a 16 9 full frame aspect ratio Conversion mode Auto Conversion type Anamorphic Mix on One Channel Feature The Mix on one channel feature allows the use of the second channel of a codec module J3 to provide mixing with a single codec module This function can be enabled for each individual play channel This feature is available for playlists only in Spotbox and Multicam LSM configurations and with all controllers The Mix on one channel feature is available in the following conditions with a valid license code 31 with a sufficient bandwidth 275 MBytes sec with XT3 6U and 110 MBytes sec with XT3 4U 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Supported Modes 1 PGM Mode In a single PGM mode users working in a Spotbox configuration with PDirector no longer need to use two channels in PGM PRV mode to play back a playlist with effects When they activate the mix on one channel feature they can play back a playlist wi
257. runs an SD codec the following timecode information is displayed e LTC timecode e VITC timecode on the various recorders SERVER MONITORING Sh F4 Network Monitoring F9 CLIP Fi PL TimeCode Monitoring Analog LIC 65 43 52 28 VITC Reci 09 13 14 Rec2 09 13 14 Rec3 gt 69 13514 Rec4 09 13 14 ALT Q EXIT MULTICAM 292 4 Monitoring CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 E 1 Timecodes on HD Recorders When the server runs an HD codec the following timecode information is displayed LTC timecode HANC timecodes on the various recorders ISh ESC VGal EXPLORER Sh F4 Network Monitoring F9 CLIP F10 PLST 00 00 00 00 HANC VITC 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 1 6 Log Management Introduction The Log Management window displays a menu dedicated to log management This window allows a user friendly and easy management of the logs where log files can be accessed from a remote computer while the Multicam is still in use Critical Mul_Gbe mC_HAL Critical Mul_General mC_SYSMon Critical Mul_Datahbase mC_General Critical Mul_Sdti_Cmd mC_GBE_Driver Critical Mul_Console mC_SCSI Critical Mul_Remote_ mC_Cache Critical Mul_Remote_1 mC_Av Index Critical Mul_Remote_2 mC_DataTrfSched Critical Mul_Remote_3 mC_Cn 1Mgr Critical Mul_Remote_4 nC_DataSave Critical Mul_Remote_5 mC_S ystemBackup Critical Mul_PlayList mC_fAudio_Recs Critical Mul_TimeLine mC_Sdt
258. rver The 3G Dual parameter is set to a proper value See section Base Settings on page 141 Limitations Codec Limitations 1080p can only be used with Intra and Proxy codecs 1080p only supports AVC Intra Avid DNxHD and Apple ProRes 422 codecs 1080p cannot be used with LongGOP codecs Configuration Limitations The EVS server supports up to 6 channels of 1080p video 1080p does not support Mix on one channel feature 1080p does not support XREC configurations 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 2 1 File Interoperability From Multicam 12 02 the XT3 server working in 1080p encodes or decodes natively the full 1080p video in a single file on the EVS server This provides file interoperability without requiring transcoding This feature is only supported on an XT3 fitted with a H3X and V3X boards Native file interoperability is ensured when the following values are available for the 3G Dual modes 3G Level A 3G Level B or Dual Connections on EVS Servers with V3X and H3X Boards On the rear panel a 1080p feed is cabled with one of the following interfaces e Dual Link interface Two cables seen by the EVS server as one logical channel record or play channel are connected to both connectors of a codec module for example IN1 and IN1B in REC e 3Ginterface A single cable corresponding to a logical channel is connected to the primary connector of a codec
259. s contact EVS support 2 Multicam Setup 41 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 5 4 Clearing Video Disks Introduction This function is used to delete media from the RAID disk array This will permanently delete the video and audio data including protected clip and record trains When you change the multi essence configuration you may also have to clear Intra clips LongGOP clips or all clips The decision depends on the initial and the new multi essence configuration The table in this section will help you make the decision The following options are therefore possible e Clearing the media on all video disks full clear clip e Clearing only the Intra clips partial clear clip e Clearing only the LongGOP clips partial clear clip MEV e Clearing only record trains See section Record Train Maintenance on page 43 The Lo Res clips associated to Hi Res clips will be cleared when the user clears the clips of the on air codec Required and Optional Clear Clips When Required is specified in the following table a full clear clip is required when you shift from the given source configuration to the given target configuration When Optional is specified in the following table a partial clear clip is useful but is not required It allows you to remove old material you will no longer want to or be able to use while keeping material corresponding to the still active essences Target Configuration Intra Int
260. s are available e VideotAudio When the EVS server receives the Full EE command it is applied to the video and audio feeds e Audio When the EVS server receives the Full EE command it is applied to the audio feeds only This is relevant with the Sony plugin Editor Default Value Video Audio 3 Multicam Configuration 223 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 224 OSD Settings for Edit Rec User Interface The OSD settings allow specifying the settings related to the OSD and information to be displayed on the monitoring screen The following screenshot displays the OSD settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab in the web based interface OSD on Output Description Activates or deactivates the OSD feature Values Yes No Default value Yes Display sel Description Specifies the field or combination of fields to be displayed on the screen e The TC is the Edit TC or the User TC in case the controller uses the VITC and User TC has been selected for the Serial Sony VITC field The Name is the number of the edited playlist Values Name TC e TC Status e TC Status Name TC Name e Status e Status Name Default value TC Status Name 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 3 7 6 TC H Pos Description Values Default value Name H Pos Description Values Default value TC V Pos Description Values Default value Name V Pos Description Values D
261. separated sections e Onthe other hand the reference information on and the description of configuration parameters are described in common sections valid for all user interfaces A clear overview shows whether and where the parameters are available in each user interface Configuration Manual Structure The Server Configuration manual is organized in two sections e A section dedicated to the Multicam Setup window that mainly features o the configurations lines and their management o the functions related to server administration and maintenance e Asection dedicated to the Multicam Configuration window organized in seven tabs which describes all server configuration parameters that can be defined for each configuration line The section includes o gt the parameter description itself other server related information needed for the configuration Starting the EVS Server Introduction When switching on the EVS server the first step is the PC boot sequence followed by the boot of the video I O boards and finally the Multicam Setup application is started When Starting the EVS Server for the First Time Before you first use your EVS server you need to perform the following tasks e Define the configuration lines your EVS server should run For more information see section Configuration Lines on page 11 1 Introduction Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 1 4 1 Introduction e Define the conf
262. splays the number of raids the type of raid 4 1 or 5 1 and the number of spare disks This information cannot be modified Raid Status This section displays each raid by its number and uses a color code to display its status See section Disk Status on page 288 for more information on the disk statuses When a raid is rebuilding the percentage rebuild is displayed instead of the raid number This value shows the progress of the rebuild process See section Rebuild Process on page 41 for more information on the rebuild process 4 Monitoring 287 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 288 External Array Status This section displays the status of each external array and potential alerts Status Meaning OK No alert PSU1 PSU2 Problem with a power supply unit FAN1 FAN2 or FAN3 Problem with a fan Disk Status This section provides a representation of the disks contained in the external and or internal arrays as well as their status which can be as follows Color Code Raid Status Light gray OK The disk is connected in a raid Red Disconnected The disk is physically present but disconnected by the software Orange Rebuilding The disk is being rebuilt Green Spare The disk is connected but is not included in a raid gray dashes Not present The disk is not physically connected to the hardware How to Change the Disk Status Display Based on the selection made in the Display field two types
263. ssible and correspond to one of the channels or controllers assigned in the Channel and Control settings Channels tab page 1 e PGMx The GPI is sent to the specified play channel e RECx The CPI is sent to the specified record channel e RMTx The CPI is sent to the remote controller e lt Protocol Name gt The GPI is sent to the third party controlling device 3 Multicam Configuration 231 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA 232 GPIls IN Port Description Values Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Specifies the RS422 port on which the server will receive the input signal This setting is relevant when the device is an EVS remote controller or third party controller The possible values are from 1 to 6 it corresponds to the RS422 port to which the controller specified in the Channel Device field is assigned in the Port settings Channels tab page 1 GPls IN Function Description Values Default value Specifies the function associated to the GPI input line According the configured protocol some or all of the functions described below are available e Play sends a play command at 100 speed on the selected channel e Pause sends a pause command on the selected channel e Recue sends a jump to the IN point of the on air element on the selected channel If this is a playlist the jump is performed to the IN point of the first clip of the playlist e Previous sends a command to go to the previous clip of a pla
264. ssociated audio 3 Multicam Configuration 181 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Available Dolby Configurations Case 1 The 5 1 audio signal is carried on 6 discrete PCM audio channels e Itis available on an XT3 server in all configurations e The audio can be analog digital or embedded depending on the configuration e In AES audio if the audio is correctly genlocked to the video the sample rate converter can be switched off Case 2 The 5 1 audio signal is coded in the two channel Dolby E standard e Dolby E over AES EBU links Set the configuration of the pair of channels carrying the Dolby E signal to DY in the Multicam Configuration window Channels tab This has two effects e It disables the sample rate converter on the input channels e It forces all transitions to a hard cut If the sample rate converter is activated and the audio configuration is a mix between PCM audio over AES and Dolby E over AES the sample rate converter will only be applied to the PCM over AES signal Dolby E Embedded in the SDI HD SDI stream Set the configuration of the pair of channels carrying the Dolby E signal to EY in the Multicam Configuration window Channels tab This will force the transition to a hard cut o gt The sample rate converter parameter does not apply to embedded audio The Dolby E transitions will be correct as long as e the configuration is correct e the AES stream contain
265. sue 12 05 D January 2015 This protocol supports the same commands as the Sony protocol as well as the following ones Command Return 60 81 Request current ID 7X 81 60 82 Get First ID 7X 82 60 83 Get Next ID 1X 82 60 84 Get First Delete ID 1X 84 60 85 Get Next Delete ID 1X 84 60 86 Get First ID Added ID 7X 86 60 87 Get Next ID Added ID 7X 86 67 91 Request ID duration 7X 91 27 82 Open File 10 01 EVS adds some custom commands to the protocol in order to take advantage of the server potential Please contact EVS to know more about these commands 5 Protocols ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 5 4 Odetics Protocol Capabilities The Odetics protocol is a Sony Protocol extension This protocol is able to e preload clips without chaining e create clips e get the server database Characteristics Same characteristics as the Sony Protocol Supported Commands This protocol supports the same commands as the Sony protocol as well as the following ones Command Return 00 11 Device Type Request 12 11 Device Type 2X 31 CueUp With Data Odetics extention 10 01 Ack 44 14 Preset IN Odetics extention 10 01 Ack 44 15 Preset OUT Odetics extention 10 01 Ack 40 40 Auto Mode Off 10 01 Ack 40 41 Auto Mode ON Odetics extention 10 01 Ack A0 01 Auto Skip 10 01 Ack AX 02 Record Cue Up With Data 10 01 Ack AX 04 Preview In Preset 10 01 Ack AX 05 Preview Out Preset 10 01 Ack A0 06 Preview
266. t Settings Introduction The audio output settings for audio allow users to do the following e Map the audio mono channels of the material stored on the EVS server to an output mono channel of a play channel e Specify the audio gain to be applied to each output mono channel Mute an output mono channel This can be defined for the three audio types embedded audio as well as digital and analog audio if the corresponding connectors are available on the hardware configuration 3 Multicam Configuration 171 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 User Interface The screenshots below show the default audio channel assignment for the three audio types in a configuration with 16 embedded mono channels 8 digital audio connectors and 8 analog audio connectors See section Default Mapping for Audio Inputs and Outputs on page 173 for a full overview on the default mono channel assignment in the various supported configurations 172 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example In the screenshot below the audio mono channels defined on the A V material on the EVS server are allocated to the play channels in the following way The audio outputs are in dolby embedded format By default an audio mono channel of the A V material stored the EVS server is sent to the corresponding embedded channel of the play channel In this example this is the case for mono channels
267. th effects using only 1 PGM Multi PGM Mode In a multi PGM mode the Load PL setting interacts with the use of the Mix on one channel setting as shown in the table below The table summarizes how the play channels are used when you load a playlist in 2 PGM mode depending on the defined settings V3X Mod 1 V3X Mod 2 Mode Mix on one Load Playlist OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT2 channel Prim Sec Prim Sec link link link link 2 PGM No Conditional Cut Cut 2 PGM Yes Conditional Mix Mix 2 PGM No Always Mix PRV 2 PGM Yes Always Mix PRV When users set the Load PL parameter to Conditional and enable the Mix on one channel setting they can use load playlists on both play channels and play them with effects or only play back a playlist with effects on PGM1 while using PGM2 to play back something else Mix on One Channel Settings User Interface These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 5 6 or 7 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 9 Warning The Mix on one channel settings are only available if the license code 31 is valid 3 Multicam Configuration 163 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 4 3 164 The following screenshot displays the Mix on One Channel settings defined on the Channels tab in the web based
268. the EVS server you need to perform a clear clip before launching a configuration in the following situations e after upgrading from Multicam 11 XX to Multicam 12 XX e in specific changes from one to another multi essence configuration See section Clearing Video Disks on page 42 for detailed information on when a clear clip is required 2 Multicam Setup Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 2 2 3 2 Multicam Setup How to Manually Launch a Configuration In the Server Based Application To start a configuration in the server based application proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted 2 Press ENTER torun the configuration line on the EVS server In the Web Based Interface To start a configuration in the web based interface click the Launch icon gt next to the configuration line you want to launch Automatic Launch From the server based application it is possible to set the server so that the last used configuration line is automatically launched when the Multicam Setup window has stayed open for five seconds To activate the automatic launch press F7 on the requested configuration line in the Multicam Setup menu before launching this configuration This configuration line is then highlighted in black no longer in green to indicate the automatic launch is active The last
269. this mode 2 Press SHIFT MENU to go to the Main menu Es Ro Eod 3 Select Setup by pressing SHIFT D to enter the Operational Setup menu The Operational Setup menu is divided in sections and subsections named by x y where x is the section number and y the subsection number Navigating and Editing in the Setup Menus of the Remote Panel Introduction The way you navigate and edit settings is identical in the Technical Setup menu and Operational Setup menu The navigation and editing commands are explained below Navigation Commands The following table presents the commands to navigate in the Setup menus of the Remote Panel Command description Command key Moving to another section when you are inside a section SHIFT F_ key corresponding to the section Moving to the next page inside a section F10 When you are on the last page of a section you will go to the 1St page of the next section Moving to the previous page inside a section F9 When you are on the first page of a section you will go to the last page of the previous section Exiting the Setup menu Menu Scrolling through section pages with the jog wheel ENTER when no setting is selected jog 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Editing Commands The following table presents the commands to edit a setting in the Setup menus of the Remote Panel Command description Command key Selecting a setting in a section F
270. tion Description Specifies the function that activates the output line Values The following function can trigger a GPI OUT e Replace GPls OUT Type Description Specifies the type of GPI output signal that will trigger the specified function Values The following values are possible The level changes to high level at e close a activation e close Ema A rising edge pulse is generated at pulse activation The level changes to low level at open nie activation open A falling edge pulse is generated at pulse activation GPIs OUT Advance Description Defines the time number of seconds and or frames at which the output will be generated ahead of the timecode linked to the output line Values e 00sO00fr to 02s00fr e Disable Default value Disable 3 Multicam Configuration 233 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 8 3 234 GPIs OUT Pulse duration Description Defines the pulse duration number of seconds and or frames for pulse type output lines Values e 00s00fr to 02s00fr 2fr steps e Disable Default value Disable Tally Settings Introduction The Tally settings allow specifying the settings related to the tally feature This feature allows the user to automatically create a clip for each change of camera performed with the Directors Cut and to add these clips to a playlist The clips are created automatically by the server as it receives GPIs IN signals from a switcher when the director
271. tion with 3x3G SLSM 2PH 2REC 1PLAY MIX in XREC mode need to be cabled as shown below On the codec module of the V3X board used both primary and secondary channels are used for each 3G SLSM REC ODEC 1 So We Ti oS Seman Sema EE IN6 OUT 1 IN5 IN4 NE OUT 4 IN2 OUT5 IN 1 OUT 6 REC 3 REC 2 REC 1 1 2 3G 1 2 3G 1 2 3G J7 N w IN 2B w IN 1B 5 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J PLAY REC REC 1 5 4 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 ma IN 6B 35 IN 5B 5 IN 4B w CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 J J6 CHAR our out 1B CHAR our f our 2B CHAR ouT f our 3B CHAR OUT OUT4B CHAR OUT OUT5B CHAR OUT OUT 6B SD HD SD HD SD HD SDIHD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 b J4 b J3 i J4 b J3 i J4 i J3 F J4 3 J3 i J4 b J3 i 3 Multicam Configuration 83 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 84 Available SLSM 3 Phase Configurations The table below shows the available SLSM 3 Phase configurations in SD HD with an XT3 6U server A separate channel is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel which corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 AREG Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec F REG PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 1 0 0 eo ee a al 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 2 0 0 a a a a a a a B
272. tions O DEF Available SLSM 4x Configurations in 1080p The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 4 Phase cameras on a XT3 6U server They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel Dual Link or 3G IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 REC Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec SLSM REC PLAY Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch 4x 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 110 3 Multicam Configuration ae V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Example 1080p 3G 1SLSM 4x 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G configuration 1SLSM 4PH 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below With the full 1080p only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X board is used a E el Z S S A a T E R es oe IN6 OUT 1 IN 5 OUT 2 IN 4 OUT 3 IN3 OUT 4 IN OUT5 OUT6 Sy o 1a 13 2 MA J8 J8 IN 6B w IN 5B u IN 4B w IN 3B w IN 2B u IN 1B w CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 x k O o ee CHAR OUT OUT1B CHAR OUT OUT2B CHAR OUT OUT 3B CHAR our our 4B CHAR our f our 5B CHAR our f our 6B SD HD SD HD SD HD J4 i J3 _ J4 i J3 _ J4 _ J3 i J4 _ J3 i J4 _ J3 i J4 i J3 i q Note q In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link
273. ts are available 4 2 2 6 4 2 e 6 3 3 e 8 3 3 2 not useful on all servers e 1 only available in a 4K configuration only possible value in 4K The layout 8 3 3 2 is not available on the multiviewer 2 Default value e 4 2 2 for 4U servers e 6 4 2 for 6U servers configured as 4IN 2OUT or 40UT 2IN 6 3 3 for 6U servers in other configurations e 1in4K 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Available Layouts The available layouts are 4 2 2 4 identical size images 2 at the top 2 at the bottom PGM2 REC2 None None 8 3 3 2 6 small size images in the first 2 rows 2 larger images at the bottom This layout is not useful on all servers 1 It is only available with a 4K configuration and it allows users to monitor the four quadrants of one PGM as shown below 3 Multicam Configuration 205 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Display 1 to 8 Description Specifies the source linked to the corresponding display in the selected layout You can select play channels PGM record channels REC or no image none Values The values available for recorder or player channels correspond to the names the channels have been assigned in the Channels tab Channel and control settings which are the following by default e PGM1 to PGM6 e REC1toREC6 none Audio monitoring from video Description Specifies the ch
274. tween 1000 ns and 1000 ns e If the Genlock type is set to Tri Sync the secondary phase for SD SDI to HD can be adjusted by steps of half pixels 37 ns between 400 ns and 400 ns Warning e The SD phase is always adjusted according to the SDI outputs Internal CVBS outputs have a delay of 48 x 37 ns compared to the corresponding SDI outputs The internal CVBS outputs cannot be used to feed directly a vision mixer or any equipment performing video effects since the phase of the chroma subcarrier is not adjustable internally 3 3 4 Interpolation Settings User Interface The Interpolation settings are available on the Server tab in the server based application 2nd page and web based interface in the advanced mode The following screenshot displays the Interpolation settings defined on the Server tab in the web based interface 136 3 Multicam Configuration Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si 3 3 5 General Description The interpolation process aims at reducing the vertical jitter of the pictures that is present during slow motion replays This vertical jitter is actually caused by a violation of the frame parity when playing back the pictures at less than 100 speed The process consists in re building new frames to produce a more transparent result These frames have to be interpolated that is calculated by making suitably weighted averages of adjacent lines There are two interpolation mo
275. type 2 ANC packet Up to now SMPTE 334M data packets carried on the chrominance C data stream within the SMPTE 292M signal are not decoded HD All DIDs mentioned in the SMPTE 334M standards are supported e 61 gt 62 e 40 gt 5F C0 gt DF Those DIDs are saved and restored on the output channels on their original lines The other DIDs are not saved The maximum number of bytes saved per field frame for 720p is 2014 One saved SMPTE 334M packet is composed of user data word UDW plus 7 configuration bytes It has to be taken into account to compute the number of bytes saved Please refer to the SMPTE RP 291 2006 standard for the assignment of DIDs to specific applications Decoding Description Enables disables the decoding of SMPTE 334M data packets on each record channel Values Yes default No Encoding Description Enables disables the encoding of the SMPTE 334M data onto each play channel in HD Values Yes No default Custom 1 2 Description Enables disables a customized decoding of the SMPTE 334M data packets See section Customizing the Decoding of SMPTE Data on page 190 for more information Values Yes No default 3 Multicam Configuration 189 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Customizing the Decoding of SMPTE Data Upon request it is possible to customize the decoding of the SMPTE 334M data If you wish to keep uncompressed 8 bit data in the VANC data space you can select t
276. u can remove a license code from the server based application Proceed as follows 1 Press the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to move inside the options list and select the option to be removed 2 When the option is selected highlighted in white press simultaneously CTRL DELETE on the keyboard 3 Confirm the deletion of the option with ENTER Server Maintenance Chapter Contents The table below presents the topics of this section and shows whether the described features are available from the web based interface and or from the server based interface Commands Page Server Based Web Based Rebooting the EVS Server 37 Yes No Hardware Check 38 Yes No Clearing Video Disks 42 Yes No Record Train Maintenance 43 Yes No Importing and Exporting Keyword Files 45 Yes No Exporting Log Files 46 Yes No Rebooting the EVS Server To reboot the EVS server is not running in a given configuration press B from the Multicam Setup window then RIGHT ARROW and ENTER to validate the action To reboot the EVS server when it is running in a given configuration press ALT Q when you are in the Clip or Playlist page then press ENTER to confirm the action 37 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 2 5 3 38 Hardware Check Overview on the Hardware Check Purpose During the hardware check the following actions are performed e Retrieving and checking relevant information related to the various boards insta
277. udio of the main channel to the secondary channel e The embedded audio is mapped to the main channel e The audio monitoring is performed on the main channels only e Only the main channels can be seen in the internal multiviewer e Inthe Clip screen the clips of the secondary channels are hidden behind the clips of the main channels e When GPIs are used the behavior of the secondary channel will be exactly the same as that of the associated main channel Port Settings User Interface The port settings allow assigning the RS422 ports to the various external controllers EVS or third party that will communicate with the EVS server These fields are available in the following interfaces inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 1 on the server and web based interfaces e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 X The following screenshot displays the Port settings defined on Channels tab in the web based interface 3 Multicam Configuration CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 RS422 1 6 V5 Description Specifies what type of device controller is connected to each RS422 port of the EVS server Values The following values can be available if the required license codes are active EVS Remote for LSM Remote Panel code between 103 and 109 EVS Remote for XSense Remote Panel code between 103 and 109 or code 96 EVS IPDP code 120
278. umber on the OSD of the output monitors when a cue point is recalled inside a record train Values Yes default No Keyword info Description Shows hides the defined keywords and ranking on the OSD of the output monitors when the clip is loaded on its Short IN point As soon as the operator starts jogging into the clip or initiates a playback this information is removed from the OSD so that the video content is clearly visible Values Yes No default OSD on outputs Description Enables disables the OSD on the play channels Values Yes default No OSD on inputs Description Enables disables the OSD on the record channels Values Yes default No 3 Multicam Configuration 241 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 9 3 242 Background Description Applies a dark gray background to the OSD display Values Yes No default Audio Meters OSD Settings User Interface The Audio Meters OSD settings allow users to specify whether and how the audio meters are to be displayed on the OSD These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 1 on the server and web based interfaces e inthe Operational menu of the Remote Control Panel 1 2 The following screenshot displays the Audio Meters OSD settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface Audio meters Description Shows hides t
279. utput or both depending on the function H Hypermotion camera These are cameras that record at a frame rate much higher than real time The content recorded at high frame rate on a memory block of the camera buffer is ingested into the EVS server through a single record channel when the operator initiates a play command on the camera Hypermotion cameras can be controlled by an LSM Remote Panel Intra frame codec Codec type for which the compression techniques are performed relative to information contained within the current frame and not relative to any other frame in the video sequence It is shortened by intra in the manual This is opposed to long GOP codecs Source Wikipedia L Logical channel Logical player or recorder channel in a given configuration independent from the physical connections that have to be used to enable this logical channel M Mix on One Channel Feature that allows using the secondary link of the codec module of a player channel on the V3X board J3 as the preview channel to provide the PGM PRV mode with a single codec module Multicam Configuration window Window in the server based and web based Multicam Setup application from where you can define all configuration parameters Multicam Setup application Term used to refer equally to the server based or web based user interface used to set up and configure the EVS servers 322 Glossary Ee V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server
280. ve The export file is saved at the requested location If you want to export several configuration lines repeat this operation for all requested configuration lines How to Import Configuration Lines In the Server Based Application Warning If the EVS server is password protected you should deactivate the password protection Otherwise you will only be able to import the operational settings of the configuration lines selected for import 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press M to call the Import Configuration Lines command 2 The Import Configuration Files window opens The left pane allows the selection of the folder containing the configuration files to be imported The right pane allows the selection of the configuration lines to be imported onto the EVS server 2 Multicam Setup a V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 SS NC LSMCE DATANSETUPNUSER gt NewADL 121624 lt 2 Spothox 4IN 40UT Spothox 4IN 40UT AO AWNEK OOS nnhwne eo a A a A N h e pah pak poah pah panh Select a folder or a line to replace on the server ENTER Replace 3 Onthe left pane use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to highlight the folder that contains the configuration file you want to import When the folder is selected the right pane shows across in front of the configuration lines that will be imported The lines are imported onto the same position and with the same name as in the export fil
281. ver 12 05 Si Base Config Description Mode the EVS server is working in The base configurations available depend on the server type and on the valid license codes Values e Multicam LSM mode where the EVS server is controlled by the Remote Control Panel or from the Multicam production screens e Replay Only LSM restricted Multicam LSM mode without playlist management split audio nor support of hypermotion cameras e Video Delay mode where the server is used to play out the input with a video delay e Spotbox mode where the EVS server can be controlled by industry standard protocols Sony BVW75 VDCP Odetics DD35 EVS AVSP IPDP EditRec or LinX API or from the Multicam production screens e XSense mode where the EVS server can be controlled by the XSense Remote Panel or from the Multicam production screens e Server mode where the EVS server can only be controlled by the supported industry standard protocols but not from the Multicam production screens Default value Multicam LSM 3 Multicam Configuration 143 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 SLSM Rec Availability This parameter is available with the license code 110 Description Activates the slow motion recording and allows defining the type of SLSM recorder that is connected to the EVS server Values In SD e None Single SD SLSM 3x Alt Parity Single SD SLSM 3x Ident Parity e Double SD SLSM 3x Alt Parity e Double
282. ware is started Values The following values are available e No Relay 1485 Mbps e No Relay 2970 Mbps Off Default value Off Warning All EVS servers in an SDTI network must be set up with the same SDTI speed If the SDTI speed is changed on an EVS server it will automatically be disconnected from the XNet network without prior warning Net Name Description Machine name on the SDTI network It is not mandatory because a network number is assigned to the EVS server It is however recommended as it helps to easily identify the servers connected to the XNet network The Net Name will be displayed even if the SDTI code is not valid Values The Net Name is user defined and cannot exceed 8 characters Default value By default no Net Name is assigned Net Number Description The Net Number parameter defines the machine number on the network This number is user defined and must be unique for each system on the network An error message appears if the number is already assigned to another machine Values Range between 1 and 29 Default value 1 3 Multicam Configuration 193 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Type Description Defines the privileges of the EVS server on the SDTI network Values The following values are possible e Client It cannot access the content on other EVS servers e Master It can access all content on other EVS servers Server It manages the SDTI network and it can access all content
283. web based interface e Onthe Remote Panel the Technical Setup menu is not available How to Activate the Password on the EVS Server To activate a password on the EVS server proceed as follows 1 Inthe Multicam Setup window press W to call the Enable password command A waming message opens 2 Read the warning message carefully Press the RIGHT ARROW key to select Yes and press ENTER to activate the password protection The password protection is directly active in all user interfaces for all configuration parameters on all configuration lines Enabling Changes to Configuration Parameters In the Server Based Application When the password protection is active the following message is displayed in red at the top of each configuration tab in the Multicam Configuration window Video and reference Field rate Reso ion To enable changes in the configuration parameters during the session you will be prompted for the password the first time you save changes to configuration parameters in a session In the Web Based Interface When the password protection is active the Multicam Configuration window is completely dimmed and a closed lock icon is displayed at the top of the window G To enable changes in configuration parameters during the browser session proceed as follows 1 Click the Lock icon 2 Enter the password on the dialog box that is displayed 3 Press OK The close lock icon changes to an open lock ic
284. wing sections show the available SLSM configurations with an XT3 6U server e The table shows the connector assignment at the level of the V3X when there is a difference between the connection to the rear panel and to the V3X board In all cases this is specified in the introduction e The examples show how the BNC connectors should be cabled for a selected configuration 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 XT3 6U Servers Available Configurations The table below shows the available 4K SLSM 2 Phase configurations with an XT3 4U server A separate physical connector is used for each phase The table shows how the BNC connectors should be assigned on the rear panel This corresponds to the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board REC IN6 OUT1 IN5 OUT2 IN4 0UT3 IN3 OUT4 IN2 OUT5 IN1 OUT6 om REC PLAY Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec Prim Sec x Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Example 4K SLSM 2PH 1PLAY The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 4K SLSM 2PH configuration 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below CODEC 2 aaa OUT 1 IN5 OUT 2 IN4 OUT 3 OUT 5 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC 1TL 1TR 1 1BR 1 1BL 1 1TR 1 1TL J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J8 J8 IN 6B 5 IN 5B 5 IN 4B 35 IN 3B w IN 2B om IN 1B u CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 CHAR SD J1 REC 1
285. without the RAID being rebuilt a message similar to the following one and adapted to the disk type is displayed during the bootwins e if aspare disk is OK Bad SEAGATE ST9300603SS 3SE10H1J 0006 279GB 02 07 e if no spare disk is OK and the RAID is no more complete Bad SEAGATE ST9300603SS 3SE10H1J 0006 279GB 02 07 WARNING Tray XX is missing 1 disk s to be complete Then when entering Multicam another message appears even if a spare disk is available e if the faulty disk is a spare disk Warning a spare disk has been disconnected The system will operate normally on the remaining disks At the next opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk It can be identified in the Shift F5 screen or in the EVS RAID configuration menu Enter Continue e if the faulty disk is contained in a RAID Warning a disk has been disconnected The system will operate normally on the remaining disks At the next opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk It can be identified in the Shift F5 screen or in the EVS RAID configuration menu Enter Continue The operator can press ENTER and operate normally on 4 disks configuration 4 1 or on 5 disks configuration 5 1 or exit the software and return to Multicam Setup window to run a hardware check Retrieving Logs If you suspect that the drive disconnection in operation was not due to a severe disk failu
286. wo lines Le and Lp on which N3 and Ny bytes can be saved per field frame for 720p The saved data are left aligned after SAV Start of Active Video and the maximum number of data saved N Ny regular SMPTE 334M packet must not exceed 2014 If you require this customization please contact your EVS representative to specify the number of bytes you want to keep and on which lines EVS will provide you with a specific customization file This customization file will be activated using the Custom 1 Custom 2 settings SD OUT Encoding Description Enables disables the encoding of the SMPTE334M data present on the HD output on the SD downconverted output on each play channel See section SMPTE 334 Data Encoding on Downconverted Output on page 190 for more information Values Yes No default SMPTE 334 Data Encoding on Downconverted Output For the downconverted output one SMPTE 334M packet is encoded per line starting from the second line after the line specified for the switching line In other words the maximum number of packets per field is as follows e 8packets per field in 525i lines 12 19 and 275 282 e 15 packets per field in 625i lines 8 22 and 321 335 The limitations are e The data are re encoded in the same order as they were in HD but not necessarily on the same lines e If VITC is inserted in the downconverted output no SMPTE 334M data will be inserted on the lines carrying the VITC 190 3 Multicam
287. y EditRec Odetics DD35 LinX Odetics F amp K VDCP F amp K Parallel mode REC Channels The following table shows the supported protocol combinations in parallel mode on record channels Odetics VDCP Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 LinX F amp K F amp K 3 Multicam Configuration 157 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Recorder Settings User Interface The Recorder settings allow specifying configuration settings associated to the record channels These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Channels tab in the advanced display mode on page 5 6 or 7 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel T2 X The following screenshot shows the Recorder settings defined on the Channels tab in the web based application Loop Recording Description The Loop recording setting enables disables the endless loop recording of all record channels of the EVS server Values Yes default No The value is forced to Yes in all configurations except Spotbox and Server configurations 158 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Clip Capacity Description The Clip capacity setting specifies the recording mode on the record channels Values The following values are available Global Per channel e Global In this
288. y assigned to another machine Values Range between 1 and 29 Gigabit IP Configuration IP Address Port 1 Port 2 Description IP address to connect to the port1 port2 of the Gigabit Ethernet connection on the EVS server or on the Gateway PC Values The IP addresses 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 are not allowed Subnet Mask Port 1 Port 2 Description Range of logical addresses within the address space assigned to the Gigabit Ethernet connection The IP addresses of both GbE ports must belong to different subnet masks Otherwise Multicam will return an error message 6 Truck Manager Plugin 319 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 Default Gateway Port 1 Port 2 Description IP address of the router on the Gigabit Ethernet network that serves as an access point to external networks 320 6 Truck Manager Plugin ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si Glossary Glossary 3 3G Level A 3G SDI interface in which the 3G digital video stream is transferred as a single 3G SDI stream 3G Level B 3G SDI interface in which the 3G digital video stream is still transferred as 2 HD SDI streams and not as a single one 3G SDI Interface to transfer digital video content It consists of a single 2 970 Gbit s serial link It is standardized in SMPTE 424M and replaces the dual link HD SDI Cc Cable Part of a cable that arrives from the camera and is plugged into a video BNC connector
289. ylist on the selected channel e Next sends a command to go to the next clip of a playlist on the selected channel Skip sends a command to skip the clip being played on the selected channel e Tally activates or deactivates the on air flag on the selected channel This GPI is only used by IPDirector e Mark IN sets an IN point on the corresponding record channel e Mark OUT sets an OUT point on the corresponding record channel e Mark Tly sets an IN and an OUT points on record trains based on changes in camera angles of the director s cut An IN point is set on the train to which the director switches and an OUT point is set on the train that the director leaves e Exit ASP sends a command to exit the loop as soon as possible without playing the current element until its end then jump to the selected element This GPI is used with playlists in PDirector e Exit OUT sends a command to exit the loop as soon as the OUT point of the current element is reached then jump to the selected element This GPI is used with playlists in PDirector e None no value is defined None 3 Multicam Configuration ES V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Si GPIs IN Delay Description Specifies the time number of seconds and or frames that the server will wait after receiving the input signal before executing the input related function Values e 00sO00fr to 02s00fr e Disable Default value Disable GPls OUT Func
290. you use the server based application Overview of the Setup Menus in the Remote Panel Introduction When you work in LSM or XSense mode the Technical and Operational Setup menus available on the Remote Panel allow you to define e the commonly used technical settings in the Technical Setup menu e all operational settings in the Operational Setup menu The values assigned to the settings are saved as soon as they are modified Accessing the Technical Setup Menu To access the Technical Setup menu press FO from the Main Setup page The Technical Setup menu opens on the 1t page The Technical Setup menu is divided in sections and subsections named by Tx y where x is the section number and y the subsection number In all sections dedicated to a tab of the Multicam Configuration window in this manual you will find an overview table that lists the settings available in the Technical Setup menu as well as the sections where you will find them q Note q The Setup menu of the Remote Panel is dynamically adapted based on the EVS server configuration and valid license codes Consequently the settings available on the Remote Panel do not have a fixed position in the Setup menu 3 Multicam Configuration 55 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 12 05 D January 2015 3 1 5 56 Accessing the Operational Setup Menu To access the Operational Setup menu proceed as follows 1 If you are in Playlist mode press RECORD first to exit
291. ype used for data transfer on the selected port The following values are possible e TCP UDP when Portis set to Lan PC e ASCII Sony 9 pin when Port is set to one of the RS422 The protocol value is specific to the camera See the camera specific section in the operational manual e TCP when Portis set to Lan PC e Sony 9 pin when Port is set to one of the RS422 This setting is only available if the Port setting is set to Lan PC Specifies the IP address of the PC LAN XXX XXX XXX XXX 192 168 10 60 Defines the multiplication factor applied to the jog value Range of values 10x to 1000x multiple of 10x 10x Special Effects Settings User Interface The Special effects settings allow specifying special effects to be applied to such as effect duration color or tool used for the wipe and split effects for the offside line feature etc These fields are available in the following interfaces e inthe Multicam Configuration window Operation tab in the basic display mode on page 6 on the server based application on page 1 on the web based interface e inthe Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel pages 12 X 3 Multicam Configuration eS V5 CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 12 05 Sj The following screenshot displays the Special Effects settings on the Operation tab in the web based interface Paint target transition Availability Description Values Default value Set

369-M__XT3 configuration manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents